ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					PREFACE   
					HARDWARE WARRANTY   
					Rana Systems warrants to the original user of   
					an Elite Series Product, including any   
					associated software, that the product shall he   
					free of defects resulting from faulty   
					manufacture .of the product or its components for   
					a period .of ninety (90) days from the date of   
					sale. Rana Systems makes no warranties   
					regarding the satisfactory performance, mer—   
					chantability, or fitness for any particular   
					purpose, of the product or its associated soft-   
					ware. Defects covered by this warranty shall be   
					corrected either by repair or, at Rana Systems   
					discretion, by replacement. In the event of   
					replacement, the replacement unit will he war-   
					ranted for the remainder of the original ninety   
					(90) day period or thirty (30) .days, whichever   
					is longer.   
					There are no warranties, express or implied,   
					including hut not limited to those of merchant-   
					ability or fitness for a particular purpose,   
					which, extend beyond the description and duration   
					set forth herein. Rana Systems’ sole obligation   
					under this warranty is limited to the repair or   
					replacement .of a defective product and Rana   
					Systems shall not, in any event,, he liable for   
					any incidental or consequential damages of any   
					kind resulting from use or possession of this   
					product.   
					This warranty gives you specific legal rights,   
					and you may also have other rights which vary from   
					state to. state.   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					PREFACE   
					ADDITIONAL WARRANTY INFORMATION   
					Rana Systems makes no warranties, either express   
					or implied, with respect to this manual or with   
					respect to the software described in this   
					manual, its quality, performance, merchant-   
					ability, or fitness for any particular purpose.   
					Rana Systems software is supplied “as is”. The   
					entire risk as to its quality and performance is   
					with the buyer. Should the programs or utili-   
					ties prove defective following receipt, the   
					buyer (and not Rana Systems, its distributor, or   
					its retailer) assumes the entire cost of all   
					necessary servicing, repair, or correction and   
					any incidental or consequential damages. In no   
					event will Rana Systems be liable for direct,   
					indirect, incidental, or consequential damages   
					resulting from any defect in the software, even   
					if Rana Systems has been advised of the possi -   
					bility of such damages. Rana Systems reserves   
					the right to make improvements in the products   
					described in this manual at any time and without   
					notice. Some states do not allow the exclusion   
					or limitation of implied warranties or liability   
					for incidental or consequential damages, so the   
					above limitation or exclusion may not apply to   
					you.   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SERVICE INFORMATION   
					PREFACE   
					If your Elite Series product requires repair,   
					please return it to the dealer from whom it was   
					purchased. If it is not possible to return the   
					product to your dealer, you may contact Rana   
					Systems directly for factory or regional service   
					information. You are responsible for all   
					shipping or postage charges incurred upon   
					shipment to Rana Systems or any designated Rana   
					Systems service center. Rana Systems or our   
					designated service center. will prepay all   
					shipping charges incurred upon return shipment   
					to you, provided the shipment is via a method   
					acceptable to the factory and/or service center.   
					Return shipping charges on out off warranty units   
					may be included in the repair charges, at the   
					discretion off Rana Systems or our service centers.   
					All returns to Rana Systems or our service   
					centers must be accompanied by a Material Return   
					Authorization number (MRA), written prominently   
					on the outside of the shipping container. MRA   
					numbers must be obtained directly from Rana   
					Systems or the service center to which the   
					product will be shipped. One service center   
					cannot necessarily supply a MRA number for   
					another service center.   
					If the repair is required during the warranty   
					period, proof off purchase must be enclosed with   
					the product. During warranty, we will replace   
					or repair your Elite Series product without any   
					parts or labor charges to you. If the Elite   
					Series product requires service after the   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					PREFACE   
					warranty period expires, it will be repaired for   
					a flat fee. Inquiries regarding repair charges   
					on products being returned to Rana Systems or   
					one of our service centers for service should be   
					made directly to Rana Systems.   
					Neither Rana Systems nor our service, centers   
					assume responsibility for any loss or damage   
					incurred during transit to or from the factory   
					or service center, claims, arising from such   
					loss or damage should be filed immediately with   
					the shipping company. Carriers generally do not   
					assume responsibility for any damage due to   
					improper packaging, so all return shipments to   
					Rana Systems or our service centers should be   
					properly packaged. Return shipments to you will   
					be packaged with the same considerations which   
					new units receive.   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CONTENTS   
					TABLE OF CONTENTS   
					1. INSTALLATION.......................... 1   
					
					1.2. Connecting Drive Cables............. 1   
					
					2. OPERATING.............................. 1   
					2.1. Elite Drives Write—Protect Switch... 1   
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
					6.1. Introduction........................ 1   
					
					
					
					
					
					
					7. OPERATIONAL THEORY OF ELITE PRODUCTS..... 1   
					
					7.1.1. General Operation............ 1   
					
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CONTENTS   
					
					
					
					7.2. Elite Controller...................... 7   
					7.2.1. Introduction................... 7   
					
					
					7.2.4. EPROM Logic.................... 9   
					
					7.2.6. Addressahle Latch.............. 12   
					
					7.2.8.Data Buffer/Internal Data Ru ... 12   
					
					7.2.10. Power-On Reset................ 17   
					
					
					
					8.2. Diskette Care and Handling......... 3   
					
					8.4. Write Protect...................... 6   
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CONTENTS   
					
					
					
					A. DISKETTE DATA RECORDING............ 3   
					
					A.2. Tracks and Sectors................ 3   
					
					
					
					
					A.5.2. Gap 2...................... 20   
					
					
					A.7. Sector Interleaving...............41   
					
					
					
					B.3. RWTS Alterations.................. 3   
					
					
					
					
					
					
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CONTENTS   
					LIST OF FIGURES   
					
					
					
					6-2: Elite One Characteristics (cont.)..... 3   
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
					A-1: FM Recording Pattern.................. 11   
					A-2: FM Bit Cell........................... 12   
					A-3: FM Byte Recording..................... 13   
					A-4: Reading Data.......................... 14   
					A-5: Writing Data.......................... 16   
					A-6: Track Formatting...................... 18   
					A-7: Self-Sync Byte........................ 19   
					A-8: Read Syncronizing..................... 22   
					A-9: Unsyncronized Write................... 24   
					A-10: Data Field Shifting.................. 25   
					A-11: Address Field........................ 26   
					A-12: Data Field........................... 28   
					A-13: 4—plus—4 Encoding.................... 31   
					A-14: 4—plus-4 Decoding.................... 32   
					A-15: 5-plus-3 Encoding.................... 34   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CONTENTS   
					A-16: 5-plus-3 Conversion Table............ 35   
					A-17: Data encoding........................ 37   
					A-18: Data Decoding........................ 38   
					A-19: 6—plus—2 Encoding.................... 39   
					A-20: 6—plus—2 Conversion Table............ 40   
					A-21: Standard System Interleaves.......... 43   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					INTRODUCTION   
					0.0   
					INTRODUCTION   
					Congratulations! Now that you have bought one of   
					the totally new elite Series products, you have   
					done more for your Apple than Apple could do.   
					If you are an Elite Controller card user, you’ll   
					find it is designed specifically to solve one of   
					the major problems sophisticated Apple II users   
					have these days: too many cards, not enough   
					slots. The Elite Controller’s ability to   
					handle four drives from just one slot provides a   
					perfect solution. And in addition, if you have   
					a library of diskettes which go back to the   
					ancient 13—sector WS days, the Elite Controller   
					allows you to autoboot these diskettes without   
					any awkward pre-boot diskettes or controller   
					card jumpers.   
					If you are an Elite Series drive user, the high   
					capacity of your new drive will immediately help   
					you to obtain the maximum efficiency from your   
					existing Apple II hardware and software.   
					Holding more information is even more valuable   
					when you can get to it faster, so your new drive   
					has engineered into it a head positioning mech-   
					anism that positions up to three times faster   
					across the diskette with greater accuracy than   
					Apple’s.   
					We at RANA know that modern business and profes—   
					sional needs have outstripped many of the early   
					Apple designs but our cost effective improve-   
					ments make the sophisticated Elite Series   
					Page 0—1   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					INTRODUCTION   
					Products less expensive to run in the   
					comparisions which count: price per kilobyte of   
					drive storage and expandability per controller   
					card purchased.   
					We are proud off the Elite Series, and we know   
					you will be too.   
					Ta achieve the best results and the most enjoy-   
					ment from your new Elite Product, we suggest you   
					read this manual carefully.   
					We have tried to avoid including too many tech-   
					nicalities hut,. if you feel we have gone beyond   
					what you require, please hear with us. Like we   
					said, we are proud of our products too!   
					Page 0-2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL INSTALLATION   
					1.   
					INSTALLATION   
					1.1.   
					Unpacking   
					During unpacking, care should be taken to ensure   
					that all tools are nonmaqnetic and do not in-   
					flict damage to the unit. Carefully unwrap the   
					package and save the material which will be   
					useful in the future for protection during stor-   
					age or travel.   
					Before attempting to use an Elite disk drive,   
					check for a protective shipping diskette inside   
					the drive. Elite One drives do not require a   
					protective diskettes, so were may or may not be   
					one in the drive.   
					NOTE:   
					Before   
					connecting   
					or   
					disconnecting   
					ANY   
					equipment TURN OFF ALL COMPUTER AND PERIPHERAL   
					POWER.   
					1.2.   
					Connecting Drive Cables   
					A flat ribbon cable is already connected to your   
					Elite Series or Disk II disk drive(s). The   
					other end of these cables must be connected to   
					your disk controller card. For you first drive,   
					connect the drive to the upper set of pins. Be   
					sure to orient pin one on the connector with pin   
					one on the controller- card, Pin one on the   
					connector is marked with a small arrow, Pin one   
					on the controller card is numbered.   
					If this connection is incorrectly made, consid-   
					erable damage may be done to the electronics of   
					Page 1-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					INSTALLATION   
					both the drive and the controller. Be sure to   
					make the connection BEFORE installing the   
					controller card into the Apple motherboard.   
					If you are installing a second disk drive, you   
					should connect: the ribbon cable from the second   
					drive onto the next set. of pins down on the   
					controller card marked “DRIVE 2”, taking the   
					same precautions as above.   
					If you are connecting and third (and fourth)   
					drive to an Elite Controller, they would be   
					connected to the third and fourth set of pins   
					from the top down. Once again, be sure to   
					orient pin one correctly.   
					1.3.   
					Installing Your Controller Card   
					To install your controller card into the Apple,   
					simply plug the card into any slot (except zero)   
					in the back of the Apple II motherboard as   
					follows:   
					1. With the power switch OFF, remove the top   
					cover from the Apple II computer by lifting from   
					the rear edge.   
					2. Choose a slot which would be correct for your   
					application. Most packages which run under   
					Apple DOS (or are protected from copying) do not   
					care which slot you use for your drives; however   
					the more advanced operating systems (like CP/M   
					and Apple Pascal) require that your first   
					controller card be located in slot six. This has   
					made slot six the “standard” slot for a disk   
					controller card, so you should consider placing   
					Page 1-2   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					INSTALLATION   
					you controller in that slot.   
					3.   
					Insert the gold covered “fingers” into the   
					slot and GENTLY rock the controller card into a   
					firmly seated position.   
					4. Adjust your ribbon cables so they pass easily   
					out through the back of the computer through the   
					vertical openings in the rear of the case.   
					5.   
					If you wish to install a second controller   
					card, the same procedure outlined above would be   
					used; except the “standard” slot number for   
					second controllers is slot five. A third   
					controller would normally go in slot four.   
					6.   
					Replace the lid, remembering to slide the   
					front edge into the case first, then press down   
					on the two rear corners until they pop into   
					place.   
					7.   
					Your Elite product is now installed and the   
					Apple II can be turned on. Your disk drive(s)   
					can be placed in a convenient location, usually   
					along side or on top of the computer.   
					See figures 1. and 1.2 for correct cable connec-   
					tions to the Elite and Disk If controller cards.   
					Page 1-3   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					INSTALLATION   
					drive 1 connector   
					drive 2 connector   
					drive 3 connector   
					drive 4 connector   
					controller card   
					Fig. 1-1: Elite Cont roller Cable Connections   
					Page 1-4   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					INSTALLATION   
					ribbon cable   
					drive 1 connector   
					to disk drive   
					drive 2 connector   
					controller card   
					Fig. 1-2: Disk Il Cont roller Cable Connections   
					Page 1—5   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					INSTALLATION   
					This page intentional1y left blank.   
					Page 1-6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					2. OPERATING   
					OPERATION   
					If the only Elite product you currently have is   
					the Elite Controller, then this section probably   
					won’t be off must interest to you. Since the   
					Elite Controller has no switches (13/16 sector   
					booting is automatic) and we haven’t, supplied   
					you with a slot in the card in which you could   
					insert a diskette, there is nothing’ which you   
					could “operate”.   
					If you are a programmer who is interested in how   
					to manipulate the controller card software—wise,   
					such secrets are revealed later in this manual.   
					2.1. Elite Drives’ Write-Protect Switch   
					Operating the Elite drives is identical to oper-   
					ating a Disk—II drive, except that the Elite   
					drives have an extra write-protect switch which   
					may require a little explaining.   
					Mounted on the upper front panel of an Elite   
					drive is a touch-switch. By momentarily   
					pressing the stripes labeled PROTECT, the write—   
					protect status of the drive can be toggled   
					on/off. The drive’s write protect status is   
					reflected by a small light next to the PROTECT   
					switch.   
					The switch does not affect the write-protect   
					status of a diskette which has been protected by   
					covering the diskette’s notch. Diskettes which   
					are protected in this way are always considered   
					Page 2-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					OPERATION   
					protected regardless of the PROTECT switch.   
					Located next to the PROTECT switch is a small   
					LED which, when on, indicates that the diskette   
					is currently write-protected. This LED reflects   
					write-protecting due to the switch or a tab on   
					the diskette. An Elite drive will only permit   
					writing on a diskette when this LED is off.   
					Due to the fact that the Elite Series drives   
					were designed to operate identically to the Disk   
					II drives in every way, the PROTECT LED will   
					flicker whenever the Elite drive is seeking its   
					read/write head from track to track and the   
					drive is not in a write—protected state. This   
					flickering is completely normal, and accurately   
					reflects the write-protect status on both the   
					Elite One and Disk II during head movement.   
					2.2.   
					Recommended Diskettes   
					There are any number of diskette manufacturers   
					on the market, each offering the “perfectly   
					engineered” diskette. We do not intend to dis-   
					pute any individual claim to this title.   
					However, in the jungle of literature there are   
					certain features which should be sought out.   
					With the vast amount of technical data involved,   
					it is not easy to locate the vital information.   
					There are a number of industry-standard tests   
					which manufacturers will refer to with pride   
					(assuming their product passes the tests) and   
					these are useful pointers.   
					Page 2—2   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					OPERATION   
					The best diskettes are those which give the most   
					trouble—free recording, storage, and retrieval of   
					information for the longest period of time. Look   
					for those incorporating features which lead to   
					minimum head abrasion and which shield the   
					diskette from environmental hazards (like dust   
					particles) in a strong, durable jacket.   
					The following table illustrates a number of   
					diskette manufacturers which Rana Systems has   
					found produce consistently high quality media.   
					For advice on diskette care and handling turn to   
					the section later in this manual headed Mainte—   
					nance.   
					The following tables of diskettes include both   
					soft and hard sectored diskettes. If you are   
					familiar with diskettes required by non-Apple   
					systems, this may puzzle you. Don’t worry, the   
					tables are correct. Apple uses a kind of “no   
					sector” format in which the index hole(s) punched   
					in the diskette (which is the difference between   
					soft and hard sectored diskettes) is completely   
					ignored.   
					Page 2—3   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					OPERATION   
					Recommended Diskettes for the Elite One   
					Hard Sec. Hard Sec.   
					16 Sec. 10 Sec.   
					Soft Sec.   
					Dbl. Dens. Dbl. Dens. Dbl. Dens.   
					Sgl. Sided Sgl. Sided Sgl. Sided   
					Dysan   
					Part Nbr.   
					Ord. Nbr.   
					104/1D   
					801787   
					107/1D   
					801014   
					105/1D   
					807188   
					Maxell   
					Part Nbr.   
					MD1-M   
					MH1—10M   
					MD1—16M   
					Maxell does not use independent order numbers.   
					Verbatim   
					Part Nbr. MD525-0l MD525-10   
					MD525-16   
					18176   
					Ord. Nbr.   
					18158   
					18167   
					Page 2-4   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					OPERATION   
					Recommended Diskettes for the Elite Two   
					Hard Sec. Hard Sec.   
					16 Sec. 10 Sec.   
					Soft Sec.   
					Dbl. Dens. Dbl. Dens. Dbl. Dens.   
					Sgl. Sided Sgl. Sided Sgl. Sided   
					Dysan   
					Part Nbr.   
					Ord. Nbr.   
					104/1D   
					802060   
					107/1D   
					802062   
					105/1D   
					802061   
					Maxell   
					Part Nbr.   
					MD1-DM   
					MH1—10DM MD1—16DM   
					Maxell does not use independent order numbers.   
					Verbatim   
					Part Nbr. MD550-0l MD550-10   
					MD550-16   
					18106   
					Ord. Nbr.   
					18188   
					18197   
					Page 2-5   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					OPERATION   
					Diskettes for the Elite Three   
					Hard Sec. Hard Sec.   
					16 Sec. 10 Sec.   
					Soft Sec.   
					Dbl. Dens. Dbl. Dens. Dbl. Dens.   
					Sgl. Sided Sgl. Sided Sgl. Sided   
					Dysan   
					Part Nbr.   
					Ord. Nbr.   
					204/1D   
					802067   
					207/1D   
					800455   
					205/1D   
					802066   
					Maxell   
					Part Nbr.   
					MD2-DM   
					----   
					---   
					Maxell does not use independent order numbers.   
					Verbatim   
					Part Nbr. MD557-0l MD557-10   
					MD557-16   
					18257   
					Ord. Nbr.   
					18239   
					18248   
					Page 2-6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					3 .   
					ENHANCI NG APPLE‘ S APPLE I I DOS 3 . 3   
					Rana Systems’ Enhancements for Apple’s Apple II   
					DOS 3.3 allow automatic accessing of 4 drives   
					from the Rana Elite Controller Card and the   
					additional capacity of the Elite Disk Drives.   
					The Controller Card is capable of addressing any   
					combination of Apple Disk II and Rana Elite   
					Series Drives. The PROFILE program sets up DOS   
					(Disk Operating System) to recognize which   
					drives are Rana Elite Drives and which are Apple   
					Disk LI drives. The seek rate can also be   
					increased by the PROFILE program to take advant-   
					age of the increased speed of Rana drives.   
					The enhancements made by the ENHANCE utility   
					only apply to a master DOS diskette. Non-master   
					diskettes (slave diskettes) are what are created   
					when the DOS “INIT” command is used to initial-   
					ize a new diskette. The copy of DOS which is   
					placed on such a diskette is not ENHANCE-able.   
					Even though a diskette may say it is a master”   
					when it is booted, it may not actually be one.   
					The program which says the diskette is a master   
					is completely independent of the DOS itself, and   
					can be copied br saved (by an “INIT’ command,   
					for instance) onto a slave DOS diskette.   
					Those DOS 3.3 diskettes supplied directly from   
					Apple are all master DOS diskettes. In addi-   
					tion, any diskette which is a copy of an Apple   
					DOS 3.3 distribution diskette, made using the   
					Apple COPY or COPYA utility will also be a   
					system master diskette. These instructions will   
					assume you are using your original DOS 3.3 dis-   
					tribution diskette from Apple; but if you’ve   
					Page 3-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					made a backup copy of it, the backup copy can   
					also be used.   
					The Rana DOS Enhancements Diskette does not   
					contain a copy of DOS and will not boot DOS into   
					the computer. However, certain areas of the   
					diskette are initialized ina DOS format, allow-   
					ing those DOS programs on the Enhancer diskette   
					to be run once the system is booted from a DOS   
					master. The Rana Elite Enhancements Disk will   
					be used to create a new enhanced DOS master   
					diskette. The system tracks from this diskette   
					can then be used to create any number of addi-   
					tional DOS system diskettes that utilize the   
					desired Rana features, but don't have all the   
					DOS utilities and demonstration programs occupy-   
					ing the space the you can put to better use.   
					The following steps will guide you in creating   
					your enhanced DOS master and demonstrate some of   
					the functions of the Rana enhancement utilities.   
					The additional features of these utilities and a   
					detailed discussion of their operation is con-   
					tained in a later section of this manual. Since   
					the time required to perform the following en-   
					hancement process does not alter much between   
					using multi—drives or just one drive, only a   
					single drive approach to enhancing has been   
					described.   
					These instructions detail a very specific ap-   
					proach to creating an enhanced DOS for any valid   
					combination of Elite drives, Elite Controllers,   
					Disk II drives, and Disk Ii controllers which   
					any user can possibly dream up. This places   
					upon these instructions an almost impossible   
					P a ge 3-2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					task, considering the vivid imagination of many   
					users.   
					These instructions have been written in a step-   
					by—step manner, with some explanation of what is   
					being done at each step. All of these instruc—   
					tions have been tested at Rana to confirm that   
					they are correct. In addition, several “early   
					release” and later users also confirmed the   
					accuracy of these instructions. Therefore,   
					there is no reason for you not having complete   
					success following these instructions. That is,   
					if’ you follow the instructions completely, step   
					by step. You are encouraged to read these in-   
					structions completely, all the way through,   
					before starting the procedure. That way you   
					will have a general understanding of what all is   
					involved before “diving in”.   
					The first thing to do is to “digup” your DOS 3.3   
					master diskette which has Apple’s MASTER   
					CREATE utility on it. (If you’re a CP/M or   
					Pascal user, you’ll find your DOS diskettes   
					buried in the bottom left hand corner of the   
					closet, on top of the DOS 3.2.1 diskettes.)   
					These instructions are going to assume that you   
					have your (first) controller card in slot six,   
					and your (first) drive attached as drive one   
					(you won’t get very far having your only drive   
					connected as drive’ two). If your drive is not   
					connected in this manner, and you are not an old   
					hand at using Apple DOS, then you should prob-   
					ably rearrange your system into this configura-   
					tion for the duration of the enhancing proced-   
					ure.   
					P a ge 3—3   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Slot six is the normal location for your first   
					controller, so unless you have something which   
					conflicts, it is suggested. that you leave your   
					system in a “slot six” configuration. (The DOS   
					enhancements and associated utilities themselves   
					won’t care, hut it will make things easier when   
					following these instructions.) Drive one off of   
					slot six will be referred to as your system, or   
					hoot drive.   
					Remove all diskettes from your drives, and then   
					turn on your system. If your Apple is equipped   
					with the autostart feature (most are), your   
					system drive (slot six, drive one) should rattle   
					a little and then sit there quietly spinning.   
					If you do not have the autostart feature, then   
					your Apple will simply display an asterisk. (“*”)   
					and wait for you to type something. That “some-   
					thing” should he:   
					6<CTRL-P><RETURN>   
					Whenever these instructions need to refer to   
					keys (to be typed) which are labelled with more   
					than just a single character (such as: A, B, C,   
					&, $, etc.), the key label will be enclosed in   
					angle brackets. For example, <RETURN> indicates   
					that the “RETURN” key should be pressed. Some   
					special characters require that one, key he held   
					down while another is pressed. For example,   
					<CTRL-P> means to hold down the <CTRL> key while   
					pressing the ‘P’ key. This is just like holding   
					down the <SHIFT> key in order to type “$“.   
					Page 3-4   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					After the “6<CTRL—P><RETURN>” sequence is typed   
					on a non-autostart Apple (the <CTRL—P> part   
					won’t show on the screen), your system drive   
					should rattle for a moment and then Sit there   
					quietly spinning.   
					In both cases, the drive will end up waiting for   
					you to insert a diskette; so indulge it by   
					inserting your DOS master diskette (not the   
					Enhancer diskette). Once the door is closed,   
					the system will “boot” (if the diskette is okay)   
					and eventually display a “]” or “>“ prompt. The   
					first indicates you are in Applesoft BASIC, and   
					the second indicates you are in Integer BASIC.   
					Both are okay for these instructions. When   
					booting an original DOS diskette from Apple,   
					alot of other stuff will probably happen before   
					you get the BASIC prompt. This just means that   
					the “hello” program has executed (harmless). If   
					you never get the BASIC prompt (“]” or “>“), it   
					may be wise to try another diskette.   
					Once you get the BASIC prompt, type:   
					CATALOG<RETURN>   
					and DOS will list all the files on your DOS   
					diskette.   
					Look through the list and locate the file   
					“MASTER CREATE”. If CATALOG stops before anoth-   
					er BASIC prompt appears, that means there are   
					more files than will fit on the screen, press:   
					Page 3-5   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					to see more of the list. If MASTER CREATE is   
					not on the diskette, you are not using an ori-   
					ginal Apple DOS 3.3 distribution diskette (or an   
					exact copy af one). You will need to start over   
					again using another diskette which does have   
					MASTER CREATE on it.   
					Once you’ve found MASTER CREATE, skip through   
					the rest off the catalog listing (if there is   
					more), by pressing:   
					<RETURN>   
					until the BASIC prompt shows up again.   
					Now, you will need two diskettes (one now, one   
					later). If you are using an Elite Two or Elite   
					Three drive as your system drive, you should   
					consult the tables of recommended diskettes   
					provided elsewhere in this manual. If you are   
					planning an making an Elite Three your system   
					(boot) drive, then you will also need two addi-   
					tional diskettes for later. If you plan on   
					using diskettes which already contain some in—   
					formation, remember that all that existing in—   
					formation will be completely lost. (Don’t use   
					those diskettes containing all your accounting   
					records, please))   
					Once you’ve got one of the two/four diskettes in   
					hand, remove the WS diskette from the system   
					drive (using the other hand) and insert the new   
					diskette. Unless your second drive is the same   
					type as your system drive and you know for sure   
					what you are doing, then don’t try to use your   
					second drive right now. Just to he safe remove   
					Page 3-6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					any other diskettes from any other drives. With   
					the new diskette in the system drive, type:   
					INIT HELLO<RETURN>   
					and DOS will INITialize the diskette. The drive   
					will rattle and spin for less than a minute, and   
					then the BASIC prompt should reappear. The last   
					thing INIT did was save a copy of whatever   
					program was in memory during the INIT out onto   
					the diskette. You should get rid of this pro-   
					gram by typing:   
					DELETE HELLO<RETURN>   
					If you are using an Elite Three as your system   
					drive, you will need to repeat this process on a   
					second diskette. Insert another one of your   
					four new diskettes into the system drive and   
					type (Elite Three only):   
					INIT HELW<RETURN>   
					After you get back the BASIC prompt, type (Elite   
					Three only):   
					DELETE HELLO<RETURN>   
					Once the BASIC prompt is redisplayed, remove the   
					new diskette from the drive and reinsert the DOS   
					diskette. Type (all drive types):   
					BRUN MASTER CREATE<RETURN>   
					Page 3-7   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once DOS has loaded MASTER CREATE off the disk-   
					ette, MASTER CREATE will display:   
					DOS 3.3 MASTER-CREATE UTILITY   
					COPYRIGHT 1980 BY APPLE COMPUTER INC.   
					ALL RIGHTS RESERVED   
					(NOW LOADING DOS IMAGE)   
					After MASTER CREATE has loaded a copy of the   
					master DOS into memory from the diskette, it will   
					ask for the “hello” file name:   
					PLEASE INPUT THE GREETING PROGRAM‘S   
					FILE NAME:   
					Your response should be:   
					HELLO<RETURN>   
					Page 3—8   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					MASTER CREATE will come back with:   
					REMEMBER THAT MASTER DOES NOT CREATE   
					THE GREETING PROGRAM, OR PLACE IT IN   
					THE DISK DIRECTORY   
					THIS IS THE FILE NAME THAT WILL BE   
					PLACED WITHIN THE IMAGE:   
					HELLO   
					PLACE THE DISKETTE TO BE MASTERED IN   
					THE DISK DRIVE.   
					PRESS [RETURN] WHEN READY   
					NOTE: IF YOU WANT A DIFFERENT FILE NAME,   
					PRESS [ESC]   
					Since you won’t care about having the “hello”   
					program created for you, simply remove the DOS   
					diskette from the drive and insert (one of) the   
					diskette(s) you just INITialized. Type:   
					<RETURN>   
					and MASTER CREATE will “master” your new disk-   
					ette.   
					Page 3—9   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					When it is finished, it will respond with:   
					THE DISKETTE HAS BEEN UPDATED, YOU MAY   
					REMOVE IT AT THIS TIME.   
					IF YOU WISH TO “MASTER” ANOTHER DISK-   
					ETTE, PRESS (RETURN 1.   
					OTHERWISE PRESS [ESC] TO EXIT “MASTER”   
					If your system drive is an Elite Three, put the   
					other INITialized diskette in the drive and type   
					(Elite Three only):   
					<RETURN>   
					MASTER CREATE will then ask you to enter the   
					greeting program’s name again, so you should   
					again type (Elite Three only):   
					HELLO<RETURN>   
					After which, MASTER CREATE will ask you to press   
					<RETURN> again to “master” the disk, press   
					(Elite Three only):   
					<RETURN>   
					MASTER CREATE will again tell you when its fin-   
					ished.   
					P a ge 3—10   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					No need to remove the diskette. Since no more is   
					required of MASTER CREATE, just type (for all   
					drives):   
					<ESC>   
					and you will get:   
					INSERT A SYSTEM DISKETTE AND PRESS   
					[RETURN] TO REBOoT DOS   
					So, of course, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					and your new DOS master will be magically booted   
					for you.   
					Now for a little enhancing. Remove the DOS master   
					from the drive and insert the Rana Sys-   
					tems Enhancer Diskette. When it’s in, type:   
					BRUN ENHANCE <RETURN>   
					Page 3-11   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once loaded, ENHANCE will respond with:   
					ENHANCE   
					RANA SYSTEMS’ ENHANCER FOR   
					APPLE’S APPLE ][ DOS VERSION 3.3   
					COPYRIGHT (C) (P) 1982 RANA SYSTEMS   
					ENHANCER   
					VERSION 2.0   
					ENHANCEMENTS VERSION 2.0   
					INSERT DOS 3.3 SYSTEM MASTER DISK INTO   
					SLOT #6, DRIVE #1. PRESS <RETURN> WHEN   
					READY TO READ DOS IMAGE INTO MEMORY.   
					PRESS <ESC> TO TERMINATE THIS UTILITY.   
					(You may have more up to date version numbers.)   
					Remove the Enhancer diskette and insert your   
					newly created DOS master. Type:   
					<RETURN>   
					and ENHANCE will copy the master DOS into memory   
					and apply the necessary enhancements to it.   
					ENHANCE will then display:   
					INSERT DISK TO RECEIVE ENHANCED DOS 3.3   
					INTO SLOT #6, DRIVE #1. PRESS <RETURN>   
					WHEN READY TO WRITE ENHANCED DOS IMAGE.   
					PRESS <ESC> TO TERMINATE THIS UTILITY.   
					Page 3-12   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Since you will be enhancing the newly created   
					DOS master, which is already in the drive, just   
					type:   
					<RETURN>   
					and ENHANCE will replace the “stupid” DOS on the   
					diskette with the enhanced smart” DOS.   
					After the replacement has been made, ENHANCE will   
					display:   
					ENHANCEMENTS COMPLETE. REBOOT THE SYSTEM   
					TO LOAD THE ENHANCED DOS 3.3.   
					This message will be followed by the BASIC   
					prompt.   
					The disk which you just enhanced should be la-   
					belled “configured enhanced system master” so   
					that it will be distinguishable from the other   
					disk you will need to create.   
					If your system drive is an Elite Three, you will   
					also need to enhance the other INITialized disk-   
					ette. Insert the Enhancer diskette and type   
					(Elite Three only):   
					BRUN ENHANCE <RETURN>   
					Page 3-13   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once ENHANCE has displayed its message, insert   
					the other INITialized diskette and press (Elite   
					Three only):   
					<RETURN>   
					to tell ENHANCE to go ahead and read a copy of   
					DOS off of that diskette.   
					ENHANCE will then tell you when it is ready to   
					write the modified DOS hack out to the diskette,   
					and wait for you to press <RETURN>. Go ahead   
					and press (Elite Three Only):   
					<RETURN>   
					When done, ENHANCE will again return you to the   
					BASIC prompt. This second enhanced diskette   
					should he labelled “unconfigured enhanced system   
					master” (Elite Three only).   
					Place (or leave) “configured master” in the   
					drive, then type (all drives):   
					PR#6<RETURN>   
					To reboot your Apple using the enhanced DOS.   
					Once again, the drive will rattle and spin for a   
					moment; and then you will get:   
					FILE NOT FOUND   
					This message occurred because you deleted the   
					hello file from the diskette earlier during   
					these instructions. That way, these instruc—   
					Page 3-14   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					tions didn’t have to deal with any “strange”   
					hello program you may have had on the diskette.   
					You are now running under an enhanced DOS 3.3   
					system master. It already will recognize the   
					extra drives on an Elite Controller (if you are   
					using one). However, it is still treating all   
					your drives as Disk II’s (the minimum case).   
					The next step is to create an enhanced system   
					master which has the full storage of the drive   
					you are using as your system drive (slot six,   
					drive one). If all you have are Disk II drives,   
					you should continue following this procedure in   
					order to make a complete enhanced system master   
					(new utilities, etc.).   
					Remove the “configured master” and insert the   
					Enhancer diskette. Type:   
					BRUN PROFILE <RETURN>   
					PROFILE will respond with:   
					PROFILE V2.1 COPYR. (C)(P) 1982 RANA SYS.   
					FROM WHICH SLOT AND DRIVE   
					IS DOS IMAGE TO BE LOADED?   
					ENTER SLOT NUMBER (1-7)   
					Remove the Enhancer diskette and insert “con-   
					figured master”. Type (without <RETURN>):   
					6 
					Page 3—15   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					and PROFILE will then ask:   
					ENTER DRIVE NUMBER (1—4)   
					so type (without <RETURN>):   
					1 
					PROFILE will then respond with:   
					INSERT AN ENHANCED DOS 3.3 SYSTEM   
					MASTER DISKETTE INTO SLOT #6, DRIVE #1.   
					PRESS <RETURN> WREN READY to READ DOS   
					IMAGE INTO MEMORY. PRESS <ESC> IF LOAD   
					NO LONGER DESIRED.   
					Go ahead and type:   
					<RETURN>   
					PROFILE will then read the DOS image off of   
					“configured master” and display a table con-   
					taining each of the 28 different positions at   
					which drives can be placed on the Apple (seven   
					slots with up to four drives per slot using   
					Elite Controllers). The table will contain all   
					DISK2S” entries. Each entry is made up of two   
					different parts. The first five characters are   
					the drive type:   
					DISK2 = Apple Disk ][   
					ELIT1 = RANA Elite One   
					ELIT2 = RANA Elite Two   
					ELIT3 = RANA Elite Three   
					Page 3—16   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					The last letter is the speed at which the drive   
					is seeking from track to track:   
					S = Slow (Disk if standard)   
					M = Medium (Elite One standard)   
					F = Fast (Elite Two and Three standard)   
					Below the table, the following menu will be   
					displayed:   
					ENTER SELECTION (0-3) :   
					1) LOAD NEW DOS IMAGE FROM DISK   
					2) CHANGE CURRENT DOS IMAGE SETTING   
					3) SAVE CURRENT DOS IMAGE TO DISK   
					0) TERMINATE PROFILE   
					For now, you’ll just need to change the setting   
					for drive one off of slot six (your system   
					drive), so type (without <RETURN>):   
					2 
					in order to change a setting. PROFILE will then   
					ask:   
					ENTER SLOT NUMBER (1-7)   
					so type (without <RETURN>):   
					6 
					and PROFILE will respond with:   
					ENTER DRIVE NUMBER (1-4)   
					Page 3—17   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					So type (without <RETURN>):   
					1 
					Now that you’ve told PROFILE which drive’s set-   
					ting to change, it’ll need to know what is to be   
					the new setting; so it will display:   
					ENTER DRIVE TYPE (0-3) : 0   
					0)   
					1)   
					2)   
					3)   
					APPLE DISK-II   
					RANA ELITE ONE   
					RANA ELITE TWO   
					( 35 TRACKS)   
					( 40 TRACKS)   
					( 80 TRACKS)   
					RANA ELITE THREE (160 TRACKS)   
					PROFILE “pre—loads” your answer with the current   
					setting for the drive (O=DISK -II). If you just   
					hit <RETURN> (don’t!), PROFILE will not change   
					the setting. But, you want to change the set-   
					ting (unless you’re actually using an Apple Disk   
					II drive!!), so type the number for the menu item   
					which matches your system drive (without   
					<RETURN>).   
					For example, if you have an Elite One, type:   
					1 
					or, for an Elite Two, type:   
					2 
					or, for an Elite Three, type:   
					3 
					Page 3—18   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					or, if you’re stuck with a Disk II, type:   
					0 
					PROFILE will then ask for the seek speed of the   
					drive:   
					ENTER SEEK SPEED (0-2) :   
					0) SLOW (DISK-II AND ELITE SERIES)   
					1) MEDIUM (ELITE SERIES ONLY)   
					2) FAST (ELITE TWO AND THREE)   
					The “?” in the example will be the “pre-loaded”   
					answer (default) for the type of drive you spec-   
					ified on the previous menu. The default will be   
					the maximum possible seek speed for the drive   
					model specified. Now is not a good time to   
					fiddle with seek speeds (you’ll just complicate   
					matters), so just type:   
					<RETURN>   
					to use the default.   
					PROFILE will then update the configuration table   
					displayed at the top of the screen. It should   
					now show the correct setting for your system   
					drive. At the bottom of the table, you will   
					again get:   
					ENTER SELECTION (0-3)   
					1) LOAD NEW DOS IMAGE FROM DISK   
					2) CHANGE CURRENT DOS IMAGE SETTING   
					3) SAVE CURRENT DOS IMAGE TO DISK   
					0) TERMINATE PROFILE   
					Page 3—19   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					PROFILE has only made your change to the copy of   
					DOS it is holding in its storage areas. No   
					changes have been made to any diskette copy or   
					the copy which is running in memory. In order to   
					make use of the change, it will have to be   
					written to a diskette. To do this, type (with-   
					out <RETURN>):   
					3 
					and PROFILE will respond with:   
					ENTER SLOT NUMBER (1-7)   
					Since “configured master” should still be in your   
					system drive, type (without <RETURN>):   
					6 
					and PROFILE will say:   
					ENTER DRIVE NUMBER (1-4)   
					so type (without <RETURN>):   
					1 
					PROFILE will then display:   
					INSERT FORMATTED DISKETTE TO RECIEVE   
					ENHANCED DOS 3.3 SYSTEM MASTER IMAGE   
					INTO SLOT #6, DRIVE #1. PRESS (RETURN>   
					WHEN READY TO WRITE DOS IMAGE FROM   
					MEMORY. PRESS <ESC> IF SAVE NO LONGER   
					DESIRED.   
					Page 3-20   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					To update the diskette, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					and PROFILE will over-write the old enhanced DOS   
					with the new one.   
					When it’s finished, it will return to the menu:   
					ENTER SELECTION (0-3)   
					1) LOAD NEW DOS IMAGE FROM DISK   
					2) CHANGE CURRENT DOS IMAGE SETTING   
					3) SAVE CURRENT DOS IMAGE TO DISK   
					0) TERMINATE PROFILE   
					Since you are finished with PROFILE for the time   
					being, type (without <RETURN>):   
					0 
					and PROFILE will terminate after saying:   
					THIS UTILITY DOES NOT APPLY YOUR   
					CHANGES TO THE CURRENTLY OPERATING DOS   
					IMAGE, SO YOU WILL NEED TO BOOT THE   
					DISKETTE TO WHICH YOU SAVED YOUR   
					CHANGES IN ORDER TO USE THE NEW   
					CONFIGURATION.   
					This is a reminder that the (in-memory) (current   
					operating) DOS has not been altered. Don’t   
					follow PROFILE’S instructions! This newly con-   
					figured diskette probably won’t boot correctly.   
					Following the termination message, the BASIC   
					prompt will appear.   
					Page 3—21   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					The reason why this newly configured DOS prob-   
					ably won’t boot correctly is because you’ve told   
					the DOS image on the diskette that your system   
					drive is some special type of drive (assuming   
					you’re not using a Disk II). But the diskette   
					upon which this DOS is written is not formatted   
					for use by the special drive operating at its   
					full capacity. The next step is to create a   
					diskette which is correctly formatted.   
					Remove configured master and insert the En-   
					hancer diskette. Type:   
					BRUN FORMAT<RETURN>   
					FORMAT will respond with:   
					FORMAT   
					RANA SYSTEMS’ 16-SECTOR DOS 3.3   
					5-INCH DISKETTE INITIALIZING UTILITY.   
					COPYRIGHT (C) (P) 1982 RANA SYSTEMS   
					FORMATTER VERSION 2.1   
					INSERT AN ENHANCED DOS 3.3 SYSTEM   
					MASTER DISKETTE INTO SLOT #6, DRIVE # 1.   
					PRESS <RETURN> WHEN READY TO READ DOS   
					IMAGE INTO MEMORY. PRESS <ESC> TO   
					TERMINATE THIS UTILITY.   
					Remove the Enhancer diskette and insert config—   
					tired master.   
					Page 3—22   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Type:   
					<RETURN>   
					and FORMAT will read in the DOS image from that   
					diskette.   
					After the image is in memory, FORMAT will ask:   
					SLOT NUMBER (1-7)? 6   
					FORMAT is asking for the slot number of the   
					drive to be used for formatting. Just like   
					PROFILE, FORMAT has “pre—loaded” the message   
					with the default response. Since the default is   
					correct, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					And FORMAT will ask:   
					DRIVE NUMBER (1-4)? 2   
					This time FORMAT got the wrong default. FORMAT   
					assumes that it was run from a drive containing   
					a system diskette, so it must be the “other”   
					drive which you wish to use for formatting.   
					Since you will want to use the first drive   
					(one), type (without <RETURN>):   
					1 
					Page 3—23   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					FORMAT will then need to know:   
					TYPE OF FORMAT TO PERFORM (0—3)? 0   
					0) APPLE DISK-II ( 35 TRACKS)   
					1) RANA ELITE ONE ( 40 TRACKS)   
					2) RANA ELITE TWO ( 80 TRACKS)   
					3) RANA ELITE THREE (760 TRACKS)   
					Since the currently operating copy of DOS has   
					not been updated, it told FORMAT that the drive   
					you specified was set as a Disk II. Therefore,   
					FORMAT will default to a Disk II format. You’ll   
					need to override this by typing whichever menu   
					item number is correct for the drive you are   
					using as your system drive (without <RETURN>).   
					For example, an Elite One would be:   
					1 
					an Elite Two would be:   
					2 
					an Elite Three would be:   
					3 
					and the lowly Disk II would be;   
					0 
					Then FORMAT will ask:   
					VOLUME NUMBER (1-254)? 254   
					Page 3—24   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					The default FORMAT has provided is the standard   
					Apple default which un—enhanced DOS’s INIT com-   
					mand would use. Therefore, simply type:   
					<RETURN>   
					Next FORMAT will inquire:   
					HI FILE? HELLO   
					FORMAT isn’t trying to be cute, it’s just that a   
					short prompt like “HI FILE?” allows a full 30   
					character file name (allowed under DOS) to he   
					typed all on one line. The “hi” file is the   
					“hello” or “greeting” program’s name. For now,   
					just type:   
					<RETURN>   
					to use the default (“HELLO”).   
					The last thing FORMAT will ask is:   
					INVOICE HELLO FILE HOW (A-C)? A   
					A) RUN <HI FILE>   
					B) BRUN <HI FILE>   
					C) EXEC <HI FILE>   
					FORMAT is giving you a little option which   
					standard DOS’s INIT does not provide. This is   
					discussed further in a later section which deals   
					with each utility separately.   
					Page 3—25   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					For now, just type:   
					<RETURN>   
					to use the default (RUN <HI FILE>).   
					That’s all the information FORMAT needs, so it   
					will say:   
					INSERT DISKETTE TN DRIVE. PRESS   
					<RETURN> TO INITIALIZE, PRESS <ESC>   
					TO CHANGE PARAMETERS.   
					Now is the time to remove configured master”   
					from the drive and insert your second (or third)   
					blank diskette (mentioned earlier). Remember,   
					this diskette will be completely erased. When   
					it’s in, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					and then FORMAT will check to see if the disk-   
					ette has been 16—sector formatted before. If it   
					has, you will get:   
					DISKETTE CONTAINS DATA.   
					INITIALIZE ANYWAYS (Y/N)?   
					If it is okay to erase the diskette, type (with-   
					Out <RETURN>):   
					Y 
					and FORMAT will proceed with the initialization.   
					Page 3-26   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					When finished, FORMAT will display:   
					DO ANOTHER DISKETTE (Y/N)?   
					Type (without <RETURN>):   
					N 
					and FORMAT will terminate back to the BASIC   
					prompt.   
					You now have a full capacity diskette for your   
					system drive which will boot correctly, so type:   
					PR#6<RETURN>   
					to try it out. A “FILE NOT FOUND” message   
					should be expected.   
					There is still one last thing which you need to   
					do. You need to transfer all the utility pro-   
					grams supplied on the Enhancer diskette onto   
					your “full capacity enhanced system master”. If   
					your system (boot) drive is an Elite Three, then   
					there is a small preliminary step which you will   
					need to perform before the utility files can be   
					transferred. If your system drive isn’t an   
					Elite Three, then this following procedure which   
					will use the CLONE utility can be skipped.   
					If you’re an Elite Three user, you should remove   
					your enhanced system master from the boot drive   
					and insert “unconfigured master”.   
					Type (Elite Three only):   
					Page 3—27   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					PR#6   
					You should get a “FILE NOT FOUND” message.   
					Then remove “unconfigured master” and insert the   
					Enhancer diskette. Type (Elite Three only):   
					BRUN CLONE<RETURN>   
					Once CLONE is loaded, it will “sign on” with:   
					CLONE   
					RANA SYSTEMS’ 16-SECTOR DOS 3.3   
					5-INCH DISKETTE COPY UTILITY.   
					COPYRIGHT (C) (P) 1982 RANA SYSTEMS   
					CLONE VERSION 2. 1   
					CLONE will then ask:   
					CLONE TYPE TO PERFORM: 0   
					0) WHOLE DISKETTE   
					1) DOS ONLY   
					Just type (Elite Three only):   
					(RETURN>   
					You will then he asked:   
					SOURCE:   
					SLOT NUMBER (1-7)? 6   
					Just press (Elite Three only):   
					<RETURN>   
					Page 3—28   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Next comes:   
					DRIVE NUMBER (1—4)? 1   
					Just press (Elite Three only):   
					<RETURN>   
					The next question is:   
					DISKETTE TYPE (0-0)? 0   
					Again, simply press (Elite Three only):   
					<RETURN>   
					That ends all the source drive/diskette ques-   
					tions. Now for the destination ones:   
					DESTINATION:   
					SLOT NUMBER (1—7)? 6   
					The default is okay, so press (Elite Three on-   
					ly):   
					<RETURN>   
					After the slot number question comes:   
					DRIVE NUMBER (1-4)? 2   
					But this time you need to type (Elite Three   
					only, without <RETURN>):   
					1 
					Page 3—29   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					The last question is:   
					DISKETTE TYPE (0-3)? 0   
					And for this question, respond with (Elite Three   
					only, without <RETURN>):   
					3 
					After which CLONE will display a notice   
					concerning the use of the Elite Three backup   
					diskette you have indicated you wish to create.   
					In order to tell CLONE that you’ve seen the   
					message, press (Elite Three only):   
					<RETURN>   
					CLONE will then be ready to start the copy   
					process, and it will tell you when it needs you   
					to insert the source diskette or the destination   
					diskette. The source diskette is your DOS 3.3   
					System Master from Apple. For the destination   
					diskette, you can use “configured master” since   
					it is no longer needed and won’t boot correctly   
					on an Elite Three.   
					After each time you change the diskette in your   
					system drive in response to CLONE’s requests,   
					simply press <RETURN> to tell CLONE to continue.   
					After several diskette change requests, CLONE   
					will finally say:   
					DO ANOTHER COPY (Y/N)?   
					Page 3-30   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					In response, type (Elite Three only, no   
					<RETURN>):   
					Y 
					and CLONE will once again prompt you to insert   
					your source diskette. This time, the source   
					diskette will be the Elite Enhancer diskette. The   
					destination diskette will be your fourth   
					diskette, which you’ve not used so far. Swap   
					these diskettes back and forth as CLONE requests   
					them, pressing <RETURN> when you have made the   
					exchange.   
					When CLONE is finished, it will again return to:   
					DO ANOTHER COPY (Y/N)?   
					Since CLONE has done all you require of it for   
					the time being, type (Elite Three only, no   
					<RETURN>):   
					N 
					and CLONE will return you to the BASIC prompt.   
					Insert your “full capacity system master” and   
					then type (Elite Three only):   
					PR#6<RETURN>   
					to boot that diskette. “FILE NOT FOUND” should   
					be expected.   
					Page 3—31   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					At this point, if you are a non-Elite Three   
					system drive user, you should continue with the   
					procedure.   
					It is now necessary to transfer Apple’s utility   
					FID onto your higher capacity diskette, so in-   
					sert either your DOS 3.3 Master Diskette (if you   
					are not using an Elite Three as your system   
					drive), or the CLONE you made of the DOS 3.3   
					Master Diskette (if you are using an Elite Three   
					as your system drive).   
					Type (all system drive types):   
					BRUN FID<RETURN>   
					For instructions on how to use FID, refer to   
					Apple’s The DOS Manual. For now, just type:   
					1<RETURN>   
					in order to begin a file copy.   
					When FID asks for the source slot number, type:   
					6<RETURN>   
					For the source drive number, type:   
					1<RETURN>   
					For the destination slot number, type:   
					6<RETURN>   
					Page 3-32   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					And for the destination drive number, type:   
					1<RETURN>   
					FID will then ask for the name of the file to   
					copy, so type:   
					FID<RETURN>   
					After which, FID will give you a chance to   
					either press <ESC> if you made an entry error,   
					or <RETURN> to begin the copy.   
					Assuming your entries were correct, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					FID will then being asking for the source and   
					destination diskettes just like CLONE did. The   
					source diskette is your DOS 3.3 System Master   
					(or the CLONE of it if you are using an Elite   
					Three), and the destination diskette is your   
					“full capacity system master”. Once you insert-   
					ed the diskette FID requested, press:   
					<RETURN>   
					to tell FID to continue.   
					FID will tell you when it has finished the copy,   
					and wait for you to press <RETURN’>. So go ahead   
					and press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and FID will redisplay its main menu.   
					Pa ge 3- 33   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					The next step is to copy FID ENHANCE onto the   
					“full capacity system master”. To do this,   
					type:   
					1 <RETURN>   
					to tell FID you want to copy another file.   
					This time FID will only want to know the name of   
					the file to copy, so type:   
					FID ENHANCE<RETURN>   
					Once more, FID will give you a chance to press   
					<ESC> if you typed the name wrong, or <RETURN>   
					to proceed with the copy.   
					Given that you entered the name correctly,   
					press:   
					<RETURN>   
					FID will wait for you to insert the source   
					diskette. This time the source diskette will be   
					the Enhancer diskette (or the CLONE of it if you   
					are using an Elite Three). The destination   
					diskette will be the “full capacity system mas-   
					ter” onto which you copied FID earlier.   
					Press:   
					<RETURN>   
					whenever you have finished inserting whichever   
					diskette FID requests.   
					Page 3—34   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					FID will again tell you when it has completed   
					the copy, and wait for you to press <RETURN>.   
					So press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and the main menu will be redisplayed.   
					You are finished using FID, so type:   
					9<RETURN>   
					to get back to BASIC.   
					Now to modify FID so that the rest of the system   
					master and Enhancer files can be copied. Make   
					sure your “full capacity system master” is in   
					the drive, then type:   
					BRUN FID ENHANCE<RETURN>   
					FID ENHANCE will go ahead and modify FID without   
					any response from you. When finished, the new   
					modified FID will he saved onto the diskette as   
					FIDR. FIDR should always he used with the high-   
					er capacity Elite Series drives since FID will   
					make mistakes under certain circumstances (which   
					were taken into account by these instructions).   
					Once FID ENHANCE has finished, and it has re-   
					turned to the BASIC prompt, type:   
					UNLOCK FID <RETURN>   
					and then:   
					Page 3 —3 5   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					DELETE FID<RETURN>   
					to get rid of the old FID. Then type:   
					LOCK FIDR<RETURN>   
					to keep the new FIDR safe.   
					The last step is to transfer the remainder of   
					the system master programs (supplied by Apple)   
					and the Enhancer utilities onto your "full ca-   
					pacity system master.   
					To do this, type:   
					BRUN FIDR<RETURN>   
					FIDR works exactly the same way FID does, as   
					described in Apple’s The COS Manual.   
					For now, choose the copy files menu item by   
					typing:   
					1<RETURN>   
					FIDR will then ask for the source and destina-   
					tion slot and drive numbers.   
					Answer these questions with:   
					6<RETURN>   
					1<RETURN>   
					6<RETURN>   
					1<RETURN>   
					Page 3 - 3 6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					FIDR will then ask for the name of the file to   
					copy. Indicate all files by typing:   
					=<RETURN>   
					Because you indicated more than one file, FIDR   
					will want to know if you want “prompting”.   
					Prompting allows you to say yes or no to each   
					file before it is copied. In response to the   
					question, type:   
					Y<RETURN>   
					to indicate you do want prompting.   
					FIDR will then give you a chance to type <ESC>   
					if you entered something wrong, or <RETURN> to   
					proceed with the copy.   
					Assuming your answers were correct, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					Then FIDR will ask for the source diskette. The   
					source diskette is the DOS 3.3 system Master (or   
					CLONE of it if using an Elite Three). Press:   
					<RETURN>   
					to tell FIDR when you have finished inserting the   
					diskette.   
					Pa g e 3 - 3 7   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					FIDR will then display a file name from the   
					source diskette, and wait for you to type:   
					Y<RETURN>   
					or:   
					N<RETURN>   
					to specify either “yes” you want the file cop-   
					ied, or “no” you don’t want it copied.   
					You want to say “yes” to only the following   
					files:   
					HELLO   
					APPLESOFT   
					BOOT 13   
					CHAIN   
					FPBASIC   
					INTBASIC   
					MAKE TEXT   
					RENUMBER   
					RENUMBER INSTRUCTIONS   
					The remainder are demonstration files which need   
					not be copied, and which will take up needed   
					room if using a Disk II or Elite One as your   
					system drive.   
					Whenever you tell FIDR “yes” (go ahead and copy   
					the file), it will ask you to insert the destin-   
					ation diskette. The destination diskette is the   
					“full capacity system master”.   
					Pa g e 3 - 3 8   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once you’ve inserted this diskette, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					to tell FIDR it can continue.   
					Eventually, after saying "yes" and "no" to alot   
					of file names, and swapping the diskettes sev-   
					eral times, FIDR will finally tell you it is   
					finished. To tell FIDR to return to the main   
					menu, press:   
					<RETURN>   
					Once back to the main menu, type:   
					1<RETURN>   
					to begin copying the files from the Enhancer   
					diskette.   
					FIDR will not ask for the drive information this   
					time, it will use your answers from the last   
					copy. It will, however, ask you for a file   
					name. To this question, answer:   
					<RETURN>   
					just like last time. (Don’t worry, there’s not   
					as many files on the Enhancer diskette.)   
					Page 3 - 3 9   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once again, FIDR will ask if you want prompting.   
					This time, answer:   
					N<RETURN>   
					to tell FIDR to copy all the files without asking   
					you.   
					FIDR will again give you a chance, to press <ESC>   
					if you made a mistake, or <RETURN> if everything   
					is okay. Given everything is okay, press:   
					<RETURN>   
					FIDR will then he gin asking for the source and   
					destination diskettes. The source diskette is the   
					Enhancer (or CLONE of it if using the Elite   
					Three), and the destination is the “full capa-   
					city system master”. When you have finished   
					inserting the diskette for which FIDR has asked,   
					press:   
					<RETURN>   
					to tell FIDR to continue.   
					FIDR will tell you when it has finished copying   
					all the files, and wait for you to press   
					<RETURN>. Oblige it by pressing:   
					<RETURN>   
					to return to the main menu.   
					Page 3—40   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once back at the menu, type:   
					9<RETURN>   
					to get back to BASIC.   
					At this point, your “full capacity system mas-   
					ter” is complete as far as your system drive is   
					concerned. You will still need to refer to the   
					instructions concerning the PROFILE utility   
					later in this manual in order to configure your   
					“full capacity system master” to talk to any   
					other drives on your system.   
					Page 3 - 4 1   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					DOS ENHANCEMENTS   
					Thi s page i nt e nt i ona l l y l e f t bl a nk.   
					Page 3 - 4 2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					4.ENHANCING MICROSOFT APPLE II CP/M 2.2   
					Rana Systems Enhancements for Microsoft’s Apple   
					if 56K CP/M 2.2 allow automatic accessing of 4   
					drives from the Rana Elite Controller Card and   
					the additional capacity of the Elite Disk   
					Drives. The Controller Card is capable of ad-   
					dressing any combination of Apple Disk II and   
					Rana Elite Series Drives. The PROFILE program   
					sets up the CP/M operating system to recognize   
					which drives are Rana Elite Drives and which are   
					Apple Disk If drives. The seek rate may also be   
					increased by the PROFILE program to take advan-   
					tage of the increased speed of Rana drives. If   
					the disk is run on another Apple the enhanced   
					CP/M will automatically recognize which control-   
					lers are Rana and which are Disk If and only try   
					to access the correct number of drives for the   
					particular controller type. Changes in drive   
					combinations may require redefining.   
					Drives may be temporarily reconfigured in memory   
					only to temporarily make a Rana drive act like   
					an Apple Disk If drive and confine the files to   
					the first 35 tracks of the disk This feature   
					is useful for creating a disk to send to other   
					Apple CP/M Users.   
					As you have probably noted by now, these in-   
					structions keep referring to Microsoft’s Apple   
					][ CP/M 56K version. The Elite Enhancements for   
					CP/M only apply to the 56K version Rana does   
					not support enhancements to the 44K version of   
					CP/M since doing so would require "stealing"   
					space from the user’s program area in memory.   
					Something which Rana absolutely does not want to   
					Page 4 - 1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					do. The 56K version of CP/M can he modified to   
					support the Elite Series products without steal-   
					ing space from the user’s memory area, because   
					Rana used a little “hidden~ section of memory in   
					the 16K RuM/Language Card (which -is required for   
					56K CP/M) which Microsoft left available. This   
					small restriction should not prove to be too   
					much of a hardship since serious Apple if CP/M   
					users soon find that 44K is just not enough in   
					which to run some of the more advanced CP/M   
					programs.   
					The Apple CP/M operating system addresses disk   
					drives by a letter followed by a colon, A: B:   
					etc. up to P:. Apple ][ CP/M selects drives   
					from the highest slot number first, starting   
					with slot six, There must he a controller card   
					in slot six, and any additional controller cards   
					must he in slot five, etc. Although CP/M as an   
					operating system recognizes drives A: through   
					P:, Microsoft’s Apple if version of CP/M has a   
					necessary limitation of only supporting up to   
					six drives (A: through F:). The enhanced ver-   
					sion of Apple if CP/M will support up to eight   
					drives (A: through H:). This allows all drives   
					on two four-drive Elite Controllers to he used.   
					(Of course, four two-drive Disk if controllers   
					could also be used; or any combination totaling   
					no more than eight drives.)   
					On both enhanced and non-enhanced CP/M, drives   
					A: and B: would he drives one and two on which-   
					ever type disk controller is in slot six.   
					Drives C: through H: will change on the enhanced   
					CP/M if an Elite Controller card is in the   
					system.   
					Page 4—2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					When hooted, the enhanced CP/M checks all the   
					controllers in the Apple to determine which are   
					Elite Controllers and which are Disk ][ control-   
					lers, starting from slot six and working back-   
					wards. Whenever an Elite Controller card is   
					found, the next four CP/M drive letters will be   
					assigned to the four drives of which the Elite   
					Controller is capable. If a Disk It controller   
					is found, then only the next two CP/M drive   
					letters will be assigned to that card. The   
					system then moves on to the card in the next   
					lower slot. This continues until either all   
					eight drive letters have been assigned to a   
					controller, or there are no more disk control—   
					lers in the Apple.   
					Although the enhanced CP/M will use the drives   
					on any disk controller in any slot (except slot   
					zero), you should stick with the CP/M slot as-   
					signment convention given in the Microsoft CP/M   
					manuals; and place your controller cards only in   
					slots six through four.   
					The Rana CP/M Enhancements Diskette does not   
					have a copy of the CP/M Operating System and   
					will not boot CP/M into the computer. However,   
					certain areas of the diskette are initialized in   
					a CP/M format, allowing those CP/M programs on   
					the Enhancer diskette to be run once the system   
					is hooted from a CP/M master. The Rana Elite   
					Enhancements Disk will he used to create a new   
					enhanced CP/M master diskette. The system   
					tracks from this diskette can then he used to   
					create any number of additional CP/M system   
					diskettes that utilize the desired Ranafea-   
					Page 4-3   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					tures, but don’t have all the CP/M utilities   
					occupying the space the user needs to put to   
					better use.   
					The following steps will guide you in creating   
					your enhanced CP/M master and demonstrate some   
					of the functions of the Rana enhancement utili-   
					ties. The additional features of these utili-   
					ties and a detailed discussion of their opera-   
					tion is contained in a later section of this   
					manual. The instructions for enhancing CP/M   
					have been duplicated into two sub-sections. The   
					first is for users with more than one drive, for   
					which there are easier approaches to some   
					things. The second is for single drive users,   
					for which Rana has supplied a special utility to   
					make life slightly easier.   
					Page 4-4   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					4. 1.   
					Us i ng Mul t i pl e Dr i ve s   
					These instructions detail a very specific ap-   
					proach to creating an enhanced CP/M for any   
					valid combination of Elite drives, Elite Con-   
					trollers, Disk 1! drives, and Disk ][ control-   
					lers which any user can possibly dream up. This   
					places upon these instructions an almost impos-   
					sible task, considering the vivid imagination of   
					many users. Since the use of only a single   
					drive complicates the instructions by a con-   
					siderable amount, the single drive instructions   
					have been given their own section following   
					these multi-drive instructions.   
					These instructions have been written in a step-   
					by—step manner, with some explanation of what is   
					being done at each step. AU of these instruc-   
					tions have been tested at Rana to confirm that   
					they are correct. In addition, several “early   
					release” and later users also confirmed the   
					accuracy of these instructions. Therefore,   
					there is no reason for you not having complete   
					success following these instructions. That is,   
					if you follow the instructions completely, step   
					by step. You are encouraged to read these in—   
					structions completely, all the way through,   
					before starting the procedure. That way you   
					will have a general understanding of what all is   
					involved before “diving in”.   
					Page 4—5   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The length of these instructions is due to the   
					fact that this will be your initial creation of   
					an enhanced CP/M. Once this initial diskette is   
					created, life becomes alot easier. Even though   
					the instructions are lengthy, they are not ter-   
					ribly complex to follow.   
					If you intend to make use of either an Elite Two   
					or Three drive as your system drive (A:), it may   
					be necessary to temporarily configure your sys-   
					tem in a different configuration than what will   
					be your final configuration. A temporary prob-   
					lem arises if you do not have a second Elite Two   
					or Three to match the one you will be using as   
					drive A:. This is because you do not, as of   
					yet, have a copy of CP/M which can deal with   
					various combinations of drives. Since these   
					multi-drive enhancement instructions only rely   
					on you having two drives, you will only need to   
					rearrange your A: and B: drives. Regardless of   
					the type of drive you will be using as A: in   
					your final configuration, you should temporarily   
					reconfigure your system according to the follow-   
					ing table:   
					Page 4-6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Final Configuration   
					Temporary Config.   
					Drive A:   
					Drive B:   
					Drive A:   
					Drive B:   
					Disk ][   
					Disk ][   
					Disk ][   
					Disk ][   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Disk ][   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Disk ][   
					Disk ][   
					Disk ][   
					Disk ][   
					Elite Three Elite Three Disk ][   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Disk ][   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three Elite Three Elite One   
					Disk ][   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three Elite Three Elite Two   
					Disk ][   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Disk ][   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three Disk ][   
					Elite Three Elite One   
					Elite Three Elite Two   
					Disk ][   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three Elite Three Elite Three Elite Three   
					Any additional drives you may have (C:, D:, etc)   
					can he arranged in whatever final configuration   
					you like since these instructions will, for the   
					most part, ignore them.   
					Once you have your system into the temporary   
					configuration, it’s time to get started. Turn   
					on the computer with no disks in the drives. If   
					you have the Autostart feature, CP/M’s drive A:   
					should rattle for a hit and then sit there   
					quietly spinning waiting for a diskette. If you   
					have an old Apple, you may not have the Auto-   
					start feature, so you will need to tell your   
					Apple to start-up the drive.   
					Pa g e 4 - 7   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					A Non-Autostart Apple will “beep” then display   
					an asterisk (“*”) prompt right away. When this   
					prompt appears, simply type:   
					6<CTRL-P><RETURN>   
					When indicating those keys on the Apple ][ key-   
					board which are not just a single character   
					(i.e. RETURN, CTRL, ESC, etc.) these instruc—   
					tions will show the key enclosed in angle brack-   
					ets (RETURN>) to indicate that the single key   
					with that label is to be pressed, and not that   
					the key sequence “R”, “E”, “T”, “U”, “R”, and “N”   
					should be typed. Combined key sequences such as   
					<CTRL—P> indicate that the <CTRL> key should be   
					held down while the “P” key is pressed.   
					The “6<CTRL-P>(RETURN>” command assumes that   
					your disk controller card (Elite or Disk 1!) is   
					located in slot number six. If it isn’t, it   
					should be moved to slot six (with power off,   
					please) since CP/M will expect it to be there.   
					Should either Integer or Applesoft BASIC’s prompt   
					(“>“or “]”) appear on the screen, then your   
					Autostart Apple could not find any disk   
					controller cards. (Disk controllers won’t work in   
					slot zero, and CP/M will want the controller in   
					slot six.) If your controller is in slot six,   
					then there may be something wrong with the   
					controller. (This section of the manual cannot   
					cope with problems, check the Table of Contents   
					for the section which can.)   
					Page 4—8   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					When all goes well, one of your drives’ “busy”   
					light will be on and the drive should be quietly   
					spinning waiting for a diskette. Simply oblige   
					it by inserting your CP/M master diskette from   
					Microsoft. (Label should be up and the last   
					thing to go in the door.) Then close the drive   
					door slowly. The door may require a slight   
					amount of force, but there should be no solid   
					resistance against its closing. If there is   
					solid resistance, you probably haven’t inserted   
					the diskette all the way.   
					Your Apple will respond by displaying the CP/M   
					“sign on” message including Microsoft’s copy-   
					right notice. This indicates that you have just   
					successfully “booted” CP/M (congratulations).   
					Part of the “sign on” message will indicate that   
					you have just booted a 44K CP/M system. This is   
					correct, you will create a 56K system as part of   
					these enhancement procedures. The last thing   
					your Apple should say is “A>”. This is your   
					prompt to enter a command. A real quick one to   
					try for you first time CP/M users is:   
					DIR<RETURN>   
					CP/M will indulge you by displaying the files   
					which Microsoft so nicely included with the CP/M   
					operating system.   
					Enough playing, time to get back down to busi-   
					ness. Insert the Rana Enhancer Diskette in   
					drive B: (slot six, drive two), then type:   
					DIR B:<RETURN>   
					Page 4-9   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once again CP/M will indulge you by displaying   
					those files which Rana so nicely supplied you.   
					(What a pair of nice companies, right?) (if you   
					are an Elite Three user, keep in mind that your   
					drive will read standard Apple diskettes.) This   
					little exercise shows that the enhancer diskette   
					should be okay.   
					The next step is to format a blank diskette.   
					For now, you’ll need to use the FORMAT utility   
					Microsoft supplied on the CP/M master until   
					you’ve created an enhanced CP/M. To get FORMAT   
					running, simply type:   
					FORMAT<RETURN>   
					(Tough, right?) After CP/M loads the utility   
					into memory, FORMAT will “sign on” by saying   
					something like:   
					Apple ][ CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Formatter   
					(C) 1980 Microsoft   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					If any part of your “sign on” message is dif-   
					ferent, you may have a newer version In such a   
					case, it would be wise to look up FORMAT in your   
					CP/M manuals to make sure Microsoft didn’t   
					change something for which these instructions   
					have yet to be updated.   
					Now you will need a diskette you can format   
					(you’ll also need a second one later). If you   
					want to format a used disk remember that all the   
					Page 4—10   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					files as well as the system tracks will be   
					erased. Format will normally detect an already   
					formatted 16 sector disk and ask you to verify   
					that you want the disk erased. This includes any   
					DOS 3.3 or Apple Pascal diskettes you may   
					have had lying around. If you plan on format-   
					ting an Elite Two or Three diskette (higher   
					capacity) you should check the Recommended Disk-   
					ettes section of this manual.   
					If you’re an Elite Three only user, you may have   
					noticed that you are about to do a standard   
					Apple Disk ][ format (which means doing some   
					writing) on an Elite Three which is only sup-   
					posed to be read compatible. This is true.   
					However, since this procedure will not expect a   
					non—Elite Three to read this diskette, it will   
					all come out okay in the end.   
					IMPORTANT! A safe idea before continuing is to   
					remove the enhanced CP/M master and Enhancements   
					diskettes (and any other already recorded disk-   
					ettes) from the drives, but remember to reinsert   
					them once the formatting has finished.   
					Once you have a diskette, take out the CP/M   
					master from drive A: and put in the blank disk-   
					ette. Then type:   
					A: <RETURN>   
					FORMAT will respond with:   
					Insert disk to be formatted in drive A:   
					Press RETURN to begin   
					Page 4 - 1 1   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					You should then oblige it by typing:   
					<RETURN>   
					FORMAT will respond with:   
					Formatting...   
					Drive A: will then rattle for about a minute,   
					and FORMAT will come back with:   
					FORMAT Complete   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					Since format has done all you require of it,   
					simply type:   
					<RETURN>   
					FORMAT will then respond with:   
					Insert CP/M System disk in drive A:   
					Press RETURN   
					This smart little utility remembered you had   
					taken the CP/M master diskette out off drive A:   
					so you could insert the blank disk to be format-   
					ted. Follow its direction and remove the blank   
					diskette from A: and re-insert the CP/M master   
					diskette. When you have it in, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					The CP/M system prompt (NA>) should then ap-   
					pear.   
					Page 4 —1 2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The CP/M Operating System and all the utility   
					programs on the Apple CP/M master now need to be   
					copied onto your newly formatted disk. The   
					original Microsoft COPY utility supplied on your   
					Apple CP/M Master will do the job nicely. To   
					get it started, type:   
					COPY<RETURN>   
					After COPY is loaded into memory, it will “sign   
					on” by saying:   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Copy Utility   
					(C) 1980 Microsoft   
					* 
					The asterisk (“*”) prompt indicates COPY is   
					ready to go.   
					Remove the Apple CP/M master in drive A:, and   
					place the newly formatted empty disk in instead.   
					Place the CP/M master in drive E: It won’t   
					matter what type of drive is where, it’ll all   
					come out okay if one of the temporary con figura-   
					tions given in the earlier table is in use.   
					Following the asterisk (“*”) prompt type:   
					A:B: <RETURN>   
					Page 4—13   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The utility will respond with:   
					Insert MASTER disk into drive B:   
					Insert SLAVE disk into drive A:   
					Press RETURN to begin   
					Type:   
					<RETURN>   
					COPY will then respond with:   
					Copying...   
					COPY will then proceed to read a little from   
					drive B:, and then write it to drive A:; re-   
					peating this process until the entire diskette   
					is copied. Once COPY has finished, it will   
					display:   
					COPY Complete   
					DD you wish to make another copy?   
					Your newly formatted diskette (in drive A:) will   
					now contain all the utilities and the operating   
					system from the. Apple CP/M master. The CP/M   
					operating system on this disk is the one which   
					you will eventually enhance.   
					Page 4—14   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Take your Apple CP/M Master Diskette from B: and   
					put it away in a safe place. You should no   
					longer need it except in an emergency. Then   
					type:   
					N 
					to end the COPY utility. (Note: no <RETURN> is   
					necessary.) COPY, like FORMAT, will remember   
					that you have removed the CP/M master from drive   
					A:, so it will say:   
					Insert CP/M System disk into drive A:   
					Hit RETURN   
					Since the diskette in drive A: (the one which   
					was the blank disk) now contains an exact copy   
					of the CP/M master, go ahead and type:   
					Once CP/M responds with its "A>”, you can check   
					up on the COPY utility by typing   
					DIR<RETURN>   
					and seeing the directory of programs on the new   
					CP/M master disk.   
					The CPM56 utility from Microsoft must now be run   
					to create a 56K operating system on your new   
					master diskette. To get CPM56 to upgrade your   
					44K system diskette to a 56K system diskette,   
					type:   
					CPM56 A: <Return>   
					Page 4—15   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					CP/M will load the CPM56 utility into memory,   
					then the utility will display:   
					Apple II CP/M   
					56K CP/M Disk Update Program   
					(C) 1980 Microsoft   
					Insert 16 sector disk into drive A:   
					Hit RETURN to begin   
					Since the system disk you want to update to 56K   
					is the one you already have in drive A:, simply   
					press:   
					<RETURN>   
					CPM56 will write out the 56K CP/M system image   
					onto the diskette and then display:   
					Disk has been updated to 56K   
					Hit RETURN~T to re—boot system   
					You will want to work with this 56K system, so   
					type:   
					<RETURN>   
					Drive A: will rattle again and then CP/M will   
					“sign back on” with the Microsoft copyright   
					message. But, this time the message will say   
					“56K” where it said “44K” last time you booted   
					the system. The Rana Enhancement utility will now   
					change the CP/M operating system to utilize the   
					features of the Rana Controller and Drives,   
					Page 4—16   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					and permanently place the Enhanced CP/M on the   
					disk’s system tracks.   
					The new copy of the CP/M Master disk should be   
					in drive A: and the “A>” prompt should be on the   
					screen. Place the Rana Elite Enhancements Disk   
					in drive B: and type:   
					B:ENHANCE <RETURN>   
					Once CP/M gets the ENHANCE utility loaded, the   
					utility will display:   
					ENHANCE   
					RANA Systems’ Enhancer for   
					Microsoft’s Apple II 56K CP/M BIOS   
					Copyright (C)(P) 1982 RANA Systems   
					Version 1. 7   
					BIOS Image   
					Primary Copyright 1981 Microsoft   
					Portions Copyright 1982 RANA Systems   
					Insert a *COPY* of your Microsoft 56K   
					CP/M 2.2 distribution diskette into   
					drive A:. Please do *NOT* insert your   
					original diskette from Microsoft.   
					Press <RETURN> when diskette inserted   
					and ready to be enhanced. Press any   
					other key to terminate this program   
					without enhancing the diskette.   
					Pa g e 4 —1 7   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once that mouthful has finished displaying,   
					type:   
					<RETURN>   
					ENHANCE will go out and replace those sections   
					of the original Microsoft 56K CP/M with that   
					information which is necessary to use the ad-   
					vanced features of the Rana Elite products.   
					Once ENHANCE is finished, it will display:   
					Enhancing completed. Press <RETURN>   
					to reboot system from slot #6.   
					Since you will want to start playing with the   
					enhanced CP/M right away, press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and ENHANCE will re-boot the enhanced CP/M sys-   
					tern.   
					The first enhancement you will notice on the   
					enhanced CP/M is the additional Rana Systems   
					copyright notice right below Microsoft’s. This   
					is an easy way to make sure you have booted an   
					enhanced CP/M. Elite Controller users with more   
					than two drives attached to the controller will   
					find that CP/M now recognizes the (those) extra   
					drive(s). If you are one such user, and your   
					Elite Controller is the one in slot six, place   
					the Elite Enhancer Diskette in the third drive   
					on the controller (drive C:) and type:   
					DiR C: <RETURN>   
					Pa g e 4 —1 8   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					CP/M will now give you a directory off that   
					drive. (Wasn’t that fun!)   
					In order to complete the enhanced CP/M master   
					diskette, you will need to move the enhanced   
					utilities onto the master diskette from the   
					Enhancements diskette. The standard CP/M PIP   
					utility is designed for this little task. (PIP   
					stands for Peripheral Interchange Programs.)   
					In order to make room for the new utilities on   
					the master diskette, it will be necessary to   
					remove the old ones first. Type the following   
					two CP/M commands. After each command, CP/M   
					will simply respond with “A>”.   
					ERA FORMAT. COM<RETURN>   
					ERA COPY. COM<RETURN>   
					These two commands ERAsed the old FORMAT and   
					COPY utilities. Now, to copy the new utilities   
					onto the enhanced CP/M master, insert the En-   
					hancements diskette into drive B:. Then type   
					the following CP/M commands. After each com-   
					mand, CP/M will respond with “A> when it has   
					finished copying the file.   
					PIP A:=B:FORMAT.COM[V]<RETURN>   
					PIP A:=B:COPY.COM[V]<RETURN>   
					PIP A:=B:PROFILE.COM[V]<RETURN>   
					Each command tells the PIP utility to copy the   
					specified file from drive B: to drive A:. The   
					“[V]” part tells PIP to verify that each file   
					was copied correctly. If you’re a first time   
					Apple CF/N user, the “[“ character is produced   
					Page 4—19   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					by typing <CTRL—K>, and the “]” character is   
					produced by typing <SHIFT-M>. The Apple key-   
					board is not marked with (at least one of) these   
					characters. If you are using a special keyboard   
					modification or 80-column board, you will prob-   
					ably need to consult the manual for that product   
					concerning special keyboard characters under   
					CP/M.   
					The next step is to create a system diskette   
					which gives you the full storage capability of   
					the drive you will be using as drive A:. If you   
					will be using a Disk ][ as drive A:, then you   
					can simply read through all the steps up to the   
					rebooting of the system. Continue following the   
					instructions right after the point where the   
					system is rebooted.   
					The first step in creating a system diskette for   
					your higher capacity Elite drive is to format a   
					diskette for the drive to use when it starts   
					operating in a higher capacity way. Since you   
					now have an enhanced CP/M, you can now run the   
					new FORMAT utility in order to create these   
					higher capacity diskettes. To get the new   
					FORMAT started, type:   
					FORMAT<RETURN>   
					Once CP/M loads it in, FORMAT will respond with:   
					Page 4-20   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Formatter   
					Primary Copyright 1980 Microsoft   
					Portions Copyright 1982 RANA Systems   
					RANA Systems Version 1.1   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					In order to create a higher capacity diskette,   
					you will need to choose, from the following   
					table, whatever type of format would be suitable   
					for the drive you currently have as drive B:.   
					0 - Apple Disk ][   
					1 - RANA Elite One   
					2 — RANA Elite Two   
					( 35 tracks)   
					( 40 tracks)   
					( 80 tracks)   
					3 - RANA Elite Three (160 tracks)   
					Once you have the drive type number from the   
					table, type (without <RETURN>):   
					B:   
					followed by the drive type number. For example,   
					if you have an Elite Two as drive B:, you would   
					type:   
					B: 2   
					If you are stuck with just Apple Disk if drives,   
					then you would type:   
					B: 0   
					You should be careful to specify the correct   
					Page 4—21   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					drive type for the drive being used as drive B:.   
					FOR MAT cannot always catch that the drive was   
					unable to handle the type of format you request-   
					ed. The disk will appear to be correctly for-   
					matted but will cause a CP/M Disk I/O error or   
					BDOS error at some later stage, or your new CP/M   
					may not boot.   
					Once you’ve specified the formatting informa-   
					tion, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					FORMAT will respond with:   
					Insert disk to be formatted in drive B:   
					Press RETURN to begin   
					Insert that second blank diskette which was   
					mentioned earlier into drive B:, then type:   
					<RETURN>   
					FORMAT will respond with:   
					Formatting...   
					The drive will chatter and spin for almost a   
					minute, (or two if formatting an Elite Two or   
					Three diskette), then the screen will display:   
					FORMAT Complete   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					To end the FORMAT utility, press:   
					Page 4—22   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					<RETURN>   
					without specifying any drive information. CP/M   
					will eventually respond with “A>”.   
					Before you can copy the system onto the diskette   
					in drive B: in the correct format, you will need   
					to inform the enhanced CP/M of drive B:‘s type.   
					This is accomplished using the PROFILE utility.   
					Just like the other utilities, get it started by   
					typing:   
					PROFILE<RETURN>   
					its “sign on” is:   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					Drive Configuration Utility   
					Copyright (C)(P) 1982 RANA Systems   
					Version 1. 1   
					* 
					There is slot more to this utility than what you   
					will make use of right now. For now, type   
					(without <RETURN>):   
					B:   
					followed by the drive type number you used ear-   
					lier during FORMAT.   
					For example, if drive B: is an Elite Two you   
					would type:   
					Page 4—23   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					B:2   
					Once you’ve typed the drive type number, press:   
					<RETURN~>   
					and PROFILE will respond with:   
					Was B: Apple Disk-][ Slow seek.   
					and:   
					Now B: RANA Elite One, Medium seek.   
					or:   
					Now B: RANA Elite Two, Fast seek.   
					or:   
					Now B: RANA Elite Three, Fast seek.   
					followed by:   
					Ready to update in-memory system.   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL-C> to abort.   
					Page 4—24   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Since you, no doubt, entered the command cor-   
					rectly and received the response which would be   
					correct for whichever type of drive you have as   
					drive B:, simply press:   
					and PROFILE will update the current operating   
					CP/M so that it recognizes drive B: as whatever   
					drive B: should he.   
					After PROFILE updates the CP/M system, it will   
					return to the asterisk (“*”) prompt. To get out   
					of PROFILE, type (without <RE,TURN>):   
					<CTRL -C>   
					CP/M will respond with “A>”.   
					Unlike Apple DOS’s “INIT” command, CP/M’s FORMAT   
					does not place a copy of the operating system   
					(in this case, CP/M) onto the newly formatted   
					diskette. This task is left up to the COPY   
					utility, which will place a copy of CP/M onto an   
					existing diskette without altering any other   
					information on the diskette. Since that is what   
					you will want to do now, type:   
					COPY<RETURN>   
					to get the new COPY utility running.   
					Pa g e 4 —2 5   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once it’s loaded, it will respond with:   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Copy Utility   
					Primary Copyright 1980 Microsoft   
					Portions Copyright 1982 RANA Systems   
					RANA Systems Version 1.1   
					* 
					Once again, the “*” signals that COPY is ready   
					for a command. This time, however, the command   
					will he slightly different. Type:   
					B:A:/S<RETURN>   
					Just like with the first time you used Micro-   
					soft’s COPY, this command tells COPY to copy   
					information from drive A: to drive B:; hut the   
					added “/S” tells COPY to copy just the system   
					from one drive to the other and to not disturb   
					the other information on the diskette in drive   
					B;. Copy will respond with:   
					Insert SOURCE disk into drive A:   
					Insert TARGET disk into drive B:   
					Press RETURN to begin   
					Page 4—26   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Since the two diskettes are already inserted,   
					type:   
					<RETURN>   
					and copy will respond with:   
					Copying...   
					This time COPY will make one read on drive A:,   
					and then one write on drive B:. The new COPY   
					utility will place the CP/M system onto the   
					diskette in drive B: in the proper format so   
					that the diskette will later boot correctly   
					using that drive (or another drive of the same   
					type). When COPY is finished it will display:   
					COPY Complete   
					Do you wish to make another copy?   
					Once again, simply type (without <RETURN>):   
					N 
					Since drive A: was used as one of the drives   
					during the copy, COPY will remind you to rein-   
					sert the CP/M master diskette back into drive A:   
					by saying:   
					Insert CP/M System disk into drive A:   
					Hit RETURN   
					Page 4—27   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The enhanced CP/M master was never removed, so   
					just type:   
					<RETURN>   
					and the CP/M “A>” prompt will appear.   
					At this point in the procedures you have created   
					a diskette which will boot correctly (up to a   
					point) on the type of drive you will eventually   
					be using as drive A:, but the CP/M system which   
					is on the diskette for that drive still thinks   
					that drive A: is a Disk ][. This is because the   
					system you copied (the one on the enhanced mas-   
					ter diskette) was still treating drive A: as a   
					Disk H. In fact, that copy of CP/M thinks that   
					all drives on your system are Disk If drives   
					right now. To remedy this problem for just drive   
					A: for now, get back into PROFILE by typing:   
					PROFILE<RETURN>   
					Again, the utility will “sign on” with:   
					Apple ][ CP/M   
					Drive Configuration Utility   
					Copyright Cc). (p) 1982 RANA Systems   
					Version 1.1   
					* 
					Page 4—28   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Now let’s take a look at why the enhanced CP/M   
					is treating all your drives just like Disk ][   
					drives. Type:   
					B:=*<RETURN>   
					This tells PROFILE to go Look at the drive   
					configuration table contained within the en-   
					hanced CP/M system sitting on the diskette in   
					drive B:, and tell you which drive letter (A:   
					through P:) is set to which drive type. PROFILE   
					will first ask for the diskette to be inserted   
					into drive B: by saying:   
					Insert a system disk in B:.   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL-C> to abort.   
					Since you are interested in the diskette already   
					in B:, simply press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and PROFILE will go read in the configuration   
					table from that diskette.   
					Page 4—29   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once the table is “read-in”, PROFILE will tell   
					you the system configuration for which it is set   
					Up:   
					A: Apple Disk—][,   
					Slow seek.   
					* 
					* 
					* 
					P:+   
					Slow seek.   
					* 
					The three vertical dots are supposed to indicate   
					that the other drives (B: through 0:) will also   
					be listed. After the drives are listed, PROFILE   
					will display the asterisk (“*”) prompt again and   
					wait for your next command. On your display,   
					drives A: through H: will all be listed as Disk—   
					if. This is why the enhanced CP/M is treating   
					all your drives like Disk—][’s. We’ll fix that   
					little problem in a bit.   
					The reason why I: through P: do not show a drive   
					type is because the Apple II CP/M does not   
					support those drives through the CP/M operating   
					system. The reason why I: through P: are listed   
					at all is explained in a later section which   
					goes further into the enhanced CP/M system and   
					its utilities. The plus sign (“+”) will appear   
					after each drive letter which cannot be current-   
					ly accessed on the system because there is no   
					controller card for it.   
					The last part of each line is the seek speed at   
					which the drive is defined to seek All Disk ][   
					drives can only seek at the slow (standard Ap-   
					Page 4-30   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					ple) rate, so that is all that should be listed   
					for now.   
					To change the setting for drive A: within that   
					system sitting out on the diskette in drive B:,   
					type (without <RETURN>):   
					B:=A:   
					What you’ve told PROFILE so far is that you are   
					interested in updating the CP/M system in drive   
					B: (“B:=”), and the change you wish to make is   
					to drive A: (“A:”). However, you’ve yet to   
					specify the change to be made. Remember that   
					drive type number you used back in FORMAT and   
					PROFILE? It’s time to type that again.   
					Example: If drive A: is going to be (in your   
					finished system) an Elite Two (in which case   
					drive B: should be an Elite Two right now), you   
					would want to type:   
					B:=A:2   
					If drive A: is going to be an Elite One, type:   
					B:=A:1   
					and last, but certainly not least (by about   
					500,000 bytes of storage), the Elite Three would   
					be:   
					B:=A:3   
					Page 4—31   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once you’ve entered the drive type number,   
					press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and PROFILE will respond with (again):   
					Insert a system disk in B:   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL -C> to abort.   
					Given that you entered the command correctly (of   
					course you didl), press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and PROFILE should mutter something like:   
					Was A: Apple Disk-][, Slow seek.   
					and then:   
					Now A: RANA Elite One, Medium seek.   
					or:   
					Now A: RANA Elite two, Fast seek.   
					or:   
					Now A: RANA Elite Three, Fast seek.   
					Page 4—32   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					and always:   
					Ready to update B:.   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL-C> to abort.   
					The “Now" message you get will match the drive   
					type you specified. To update the CP/M system   
					on drive B:, type:   
					and PROFILE will write out the new configura-   
					tion.   
					Now you can turn your Apple off (don’t worry   
					about still being in PROFILE) and rearrange the   
					drives into your final configuration. When you   
					have everything set, reboot the system (just   
					like you did at the beginning of this whole   
					process) using the diskette which is currently   
					in drive B:.   
					Once you have the system rebooted, the last   
					thing you will need to do in completing your   
					higher capacity system diskette (the one you   
					just booted). To do this, you’ll need to copy   
					the CP/M distribution files (from Microsoft and   
					Rana) onto the higher capacity diskette. To do   
					this, insert the first enhanced CP/M master   
					diskette you made into drive B: and type:   
					B:PIP A:=B:*.*[V]<RETURN>   
					Page 4—33   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					This command first tells CP/M where to find PIP   
					(“B:PIP”), and then tells PIP to copy all files   
					on drive B: (“B:*.*”) to drive A: (“A:=”) and   
					verify that they made it correctly (“[V]”).   
					Since PIP will he doing a whole hunch of files,   
					it will display the name of each file as it is   
					copied. PIP must he used to copy each file one   
					at a time since the diskette in drive A: and the   
					diskette in drive B: are of a different type and   
					the files must he written to the diskette ac-   
					cording to the diskette’s type. COPY will not   
					rearrange files into different arrangements   
					according to the diskette’s type. When PIP is   
					finished, it will return to the CP/M “A>”   
					prompt.   
					All the hard work is over. There is just one   
					last little task which must he completed. De-   
					fining the remainder of your drives within the   
					CP/M system so that they are treated as they   
					should he. Since this falls under PROFILE’s   
					domain, bring it hack up by typing:   
					PROFILE<RETURN>   
					It will “sign—on” with its, usual:   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					Drive Configuration Utility   
					Copyright (C)(P.). 1982 RANA Systems   
					Version 1. 1   
					* 
					Page 4—34   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The easiest way to define within enhanced CP/M   
					which type of drive is where is by specifying   
					one long string of change commands, preceeded   
					by:   
					For example, if you have an Elite Two as drive   
					B:, a Disk if as drive C:, an Elite One as drive   
					D:, and another Disk if as drive E:, you would   
					type:   
					A:=B:2,C:0,D:1,E:0<RETURN>   
					Note that there is no need to respecify drive A:   
					since it is already defined correctly. The   
					drive type numbers come from that same table in   
					which you found the number for FORMAT and   
					PROFILE earlier. The “A:=” in front tells   
					PROFILE you want to make these changes to the   
					“system image” sitting on the diskette in drive   
					A:. Once you press <RETURN>, PROFILE will   
					respond with:   
					Insert a system disk in A:.   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL-C> to abort.   
					If you entered the command correctly, go ahead   
					at press:   
					<RETURN>   
					If you just realized you made a mistake, press:   
					<ESC>   
					Page 4—35   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					If you press <RETURN>, PROFILE will list all the   
					“Was” and “NOW” changes that it made (under your   
					direction), and then display:   
					Ready to update A:.   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL-C> to abort.   
					Once again, PROFILE gives you a chance to back-   
					out. If all the changes PROFILE listed were   
					suitable to you, press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and PROFILE will update the “system image” on   
					the diskette. If a change was not to your   
					liking, press:   
					<ESC>   
					and PROFILE will not make any changes. In either   
					case, PROFILE will return to the asterisk (“*”)   
					prompt.   
					When you’ve finished making all the changes you   
					desire, type:   
					<CTRL —C>   
					after the asterisk (“*”) prompt, and PROFILE   
					will “terminate” back to the CP/M “A>” prompt.   
					All the hard work is over. It’s time to enjoy!!   
					If you want to see the difference between a Disk   
					][’s capacity and your new Elite drive’s capa-   
					Page 4—36   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					city (if you’re an Elite Two or Three user, this   
					will make your day), look up the:   
					STAT DSK: <RETURN>   
					command in your Microsoft CP/M manuals. For a   
					Disk ][ drive, STAT will respond with the fol-   
					lowing:   
					A: Drive Characteristics   
					1024: 128 Byte Record Capacity   
					128: Kilobyte Drive Capacity   
					48: 32 Byte Directory Entries   
					48: Checked Directory Entries   
					128: Records/ Extent   
					8: Records/ Block   
					32: Sectors/ Track   
					3: Reserved Tracks   
					The drive capacity in records and kilobytes is   
					what will primarily interest you. Also, a quick   
					explanation: the 32 sectors/track is correct.   
					When Apple talks about 16 sectors/track, they   
					are refering to a “sector” which contains 256   
					bytes. When CP/M refers to a “sector”, it is   
					refering to a "sector of 128 bytes. Microsoft   
					(and thus Rana) handles this small difference in   
					interpretation of a “sector” by packing two CP/M   
					sectors into every Apple sector (2 times 128   
					equals 256). Therefore Microsoft gets twice as   
					many (smaller) CP/M sectors on every track (32)   
					as Apple does (16). The actual way “sectors”   
					are read and written from/to a diskette is iden—   
					tical between Microsoft CP/M, Apple DOS 3.3, and   
					Apple Pascal 1.1. This means that all three   
					systems can read and write the remaining two   
					4—37   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					systems’ diskettes, but they generally do not   
					understand the information which the other two   
					systems’ place within the “sectors”.   
					Remember, when it comes to the new Rana version   
					of the FORMAT and COPY utilities, the instruc-   
					tions in this manual are intended to replace   
					those instructions given in the very informative   
					Microsoft CP/M manuals.   
					Page 4-38   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					4.2. Using a Single Drive   
					These instructions detail a very specific ap-   
					proach to creating an enhanced CP/M for any   
					valid combination of Elite drives, Elite Con-   
					trollers, Disk if drives, and Disk if control-   
					lers which any user can possibly dream up. This   
					places upon these instructions an almost impos-   
					sible task, considering the vivid imagination of   
					many users. Since there are many steps in the   
					instructions which can be simplified for multi-   
					drive users, the single drive and multi-drive   
					user instructions have been split into their own   
					sections. If you are a multi—drive user, you   
					will want to use the instructions in the pre-   
					ceeding section.   
					These instructions have been written in a step-   
					by-step manner, with some explanation of what is   
					being done at each step. All of these instruc-   
					tions have been tested at Rana to confirm that   
					they are correct. In addition, several “early   
					release” and later users also confirmed the   
					accuracy of these instructions. Therefore,   
					there is no reason for you not having complete   
					success following these instructions. That is,   
					if you follow the instructions completely, step   
					by step. You are encouraged to read these in—   
					structions completely, all the way through,   
					before starting the procedure. That way you   
					will have a general understanding of what all is   
					involved before “diving in”.   
					The length of these instructions is due to the   
					fact that this will be your initial creation of   
					an enhanced CP/M. Once this initial diskette is   
					Page 4—39   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					created, life becomes alot easier. Even though   
					the instructions are lengthy, they are not ter-   
					ribly complex to follow.   
					In order to use Microsoft Apple If CP/M, you   
					must have your disk controller card (Elite or   
					Disk ][) in slot six. Your disk drive (Elite or   
					Disk ][) must be attached to the first drive’s   
					connector on the controller card (drive one).   
					Turn on the computer without a disk in the   
					drive. If you have the Autostart feature, your   
					drive should rattle for a bit and then sit there   
					quietly spinning waiting for a diskette. If you   
					have an old Apple, you may not have the Auto—   
					start feature, so you will need to tell your   
					Apple to start-up the drive.   
					A Non-Autostart Apple will “beep” then display   
					an asterisk (“*”) prompt right away. When this   
					prompt appears, simply type:   
					6<CTRL-P><RETURN>   
					When indicating those keys on the Apple ][ key-   
					hoard which are not just a single character   
					(i.e. RETURN, CTRL, ESC, etc.) these instruc-   
					tions will show the key enclOsed in angle brack-   
					ets (<RETURN>) to indicate that the single key   
					with that label is to be pressed, and not that   
					the key sequence “R”, “E”, “T”, “U”, “R”, and   
					“N” should be typed. Combined key sequences   
					such as <CTRL—P> indicate that the <CTRL> key   
					should be held down while the “P’ key is press-   
					ed.   
					Page 4-40   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The “6<CTRL-P><RETURN>” command assumes that   
					your disk controller card (Elite or Disk ][) is   
					located in slot number six. If it isn’t, it   
					should be moved to slot six (with power off,   
					please) since CP/M will expect it to be there.   
					Should either Integer or Applesoft BASIC’s   
					prompt (“>“ or “]”) appear on the screen, then   
					your Autostart Apple could not find your disk   
					controller card. (Disk controllers won’t work   
					in slot zero, and CP/M will want the controller   
					in slot six.) If your controller is in slot   
					six, then there may be something wrong with the   
					controller. (This section of the manual cannot   
					cope with problems, check the Table of Contents   
					for the section which can.)   
					When all goes well, your drive‘s “busy" light   
					will be on and it will be quietly spinning   
					waiting for a diskette. Simply oblige it by   
					inserting your CP/M master diskette from Micro-   
					soft. (Label should be up and the last thing to   
					go in the door.) Then close the drive door   
					slowly. The door may require a slight amount of   
					force, but there should be no solid resistance   
					against its closing. If there is solid resist-   
					ance, you probably haven’t inserted the diskette   
					all the way.   
					Your Apple will respond by displaying the CP/M   
					“sign on” message including Microsoft’s copy-   
					right notice. This indicates that you have just   
					successfully “booted” CP/M (congratulations).   
					Part of the “sign on” message will indicate that   
					you have just booted a 44K CP/M system. This is   
					correct, you will create a 56K system as part of   
					Page 4-41   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					these enhancement procedures. The last thing   
					your Apple should say is “A>”. This is your   
					prompt to enter a command. A real quick one to   
					try for you first time CP/H users is:   
					DIR <RETURN>   
					CP/M will indulge you by displaying the files   
					which Microsoft so nicely included with the CP/M   
					operating system.   
					Enough playing, time to get back down to busi-   
					ness. Remove the CP/M master diskette and in-   
					sert the Rana Enhancer Diskette, and again type:   
					DIR<RETURN>   
					Once again CP/M will indulge you by displaying   
					those files which Rana so nicely supplied you.   
					(What a pair of nice companies, right?) (If   
					you’re an Elite Three user, keep in mind that   
					your drive will read standard Apple diskettes.)   
					This little exercise shows that the enhancer   
					diskette should he okay.   
					The next step is to format a blank diskette.   
					For now, you’ll need to use the FORMAT utility   
					Microsoft supplied on the CP/M master until   
					you’ve created an enhanced CP/M. To get FORMAT   
					running, insert the CF/M master and type:   
					FORMAT<RETURN>   
					Pa g e 4 - 4 2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					(Tough, right?) After CP/M loads the utility   
					into memory, FORMAT will “sign on” by saying   
					something like:   
					Apple ][ CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Formatter   
					(C) 1980 Microsoft   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					If any part of your “sign on” message is differ-   
					ent, you may have a newer version. In such a   
					case, it would be wise to look up FORMAT in your   
					CP/M manuals to make sure Microsoft didn’t   
					change something for which these instructions   
					have yet to be updated.   
					Now you will need a diskette you can format   
					(you’ll also need a second one later). If you   
					want to format a used disk remember that all the   
					files as well as the system tracks will be   
					erased. Format will normally detect an already   
					formatted 16 sector disk and ask you to verify   
					that you want the disk erased. This includes   
					any DOS 3.3 or Apple Pascal diskettes you may   
					have had lying around. If you plan on format-   
					ting an Elite Two or Three diskette (higher   
					capacity) you should check the Recommended Disk-   
					ettes section of this manual.   
					If you’re an Elite Three user, you may have   
					noticed that you are about to do a standard   
					Apple Disk ][ format (which means doing some   
					writing) on an Elite Three which is only suppose   
					to be read compatible. This is true. However,   
					since this procedure will not expect a non-Elite   
					Page 4 —4 3   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Three to read this diskette, it will all come out   
					okay in the end.   
					Once you have a diskette, take out the CP/M   
					master and put in the blank diskette. Then type:   
					A: <RETURN>   
					FORMAT will respond with:   
					Insert disk to be formatted in drive A:   
					Press RETURN to begin   
					You should then oblige it by typing:   
					(RETURN>   
					FORMAT will respond with:   
					Formatting...   
					Your drive will rattle for about a minute, and   
					FORMAT will come back with:   
					FORMAT Complete   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					Since format has done all you require of it,   
					simply type:   
					<RETURN>   
					Page 4—44   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					FORMAT will then respond with:   
					Insert CP/M System disk in drive A:   
					Press RETURN   
					This smart little utility remembered you had   
					taken the CP/M master diskette out of the drive   
					so you could insert the blank disk to be format-   
					ted. Fallow its direction and remove the blank   
					diskette and re—insert the CP/M master diskette.   
					When you have it in, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					The CP/M system prompt (“A>”) should then ap-   
					pear.   
					The CP/M Operating System and all the utility   
					programs on the Apple CP/M master now need to be   
					copied onto your newly formatted disk. The   
					original Microsoft COPY utility supplied on your   
					Apple CP/M Master will do the job nicely. To   
					get it started, type:   
					COPY<RETURN>   
					After COPY is loaded into memory, it will ”sign   
					on” by saying:   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Copy Utility   
					(C) 1980 Microsoft   
					* 
					Page 4—45   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The asterisk (“*”) prompt indicates COPY is   
					ready to go.   
					Following the prompt type:   
					A:=A:   
					The utility will respond with:   
					Insert MISTER disk and press RETURN   
					Type:   
					<RETURN>   
					COPY will then read as much of the CP/M master   
					diskette as it can into memory. Then it will   
					say:   
					Insert SLAVE disk and press RETURN   
					You should then insert the newly formatted disk-   
					ette, and tell COPY to continue by typing:   
					<RETURN>   
					Then COPY will write out what it has in memory   
					to the new diskette. After it’s all written,   
					COPY will again ask for the CP/M master diskette   
					by saying:   
					Insert MASTER disk and press RETURN   
					Page 4-46   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					In response to this message you should insert   
					the CP/M master and then type:   
					<RETURN>   
					COPY will proceed like this until the copy is   
					completed. It will take about eight diskette   
					exchanges (four inserts of each diskette) to   
					complete the copy. Once COPY has finished, it   
					will display:   
					COPY Complete   
					Do you wish to make another copy?   
					Your newly formatted diskette (still in the   
					drive) will now contain all the utilities and   
					the operating system from the Apple CP/M master.   
					The CP/M operating system on this disk is the   
					one which you will eventually enhance.   
					Take your Apple CP/M Master Diskette (the one   
					not in the drive) and put it away in a safe   
					place. You should no longer need it except in   
					an emergency. Then type (without <RETURN>):   
					N 
					to end the COPY utility. COPY, like FORMAT,   
					will remember that you have removed the CP/M   
					master from the drive, so it will say:   
					Insert CP/M System disk into drive A:   
					flit RETURN   
					Page 4—47   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Since the diskette in the drive (the one which   
					was the blank disk) now contains an exact copy   
					of the CP/M master, go ahead and type:   
					<RETURN>   
					Once CP/M responds with its “A>”, you can check   
					up on the COPY utility by typing   
					DIR <RETURN>   
					and seeing the directory of programs on the new   
					CP/M master disk.   
					The CPM56 utility from Microsoft must now be run   
					to create a 56K operating system on your new   
					master diskette. To get CPM56 to upgrade your   
					44K system diskette to a 56K system diskette,   
					type:   
					CPM56 A:<RETURN>   
					CP/M will load the CPM56 utility into memory,   
					then the utility will display:   
					Apple ][ CP/M   
					56K CP/M Disk Update Program   
					(C) 1980 Microsoft   
					Insert 16 sector disk into drive A:   
					Hit RETURN to begin   
					Page 4—48   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Since the system disk you want to update to 56K   
					is the one you already have in drive A:, simply   
					press:   
					<RETURN>   
					CPM56 will write out the 56K CP/M system image   
					onto the diskette and then display:   
					Disk has been updated to 56K   
					Hit RETURN to re-Boot system   
					You will want to work with this 56K system, so   
					type:   
					<RETURN>   
					Your drive will rattle again and then CP/M will   
					~‘sign back on” with the Microsoft copyright   
					message. But, this time the message will say   
					“56K” where it said “44K” last time you booted   
					the system. The Rena Enhancement utility will   
					now change the CP/M operating system to utilize   
					the features of the Rena controller and drives,   
					and permanently place the Enhanced CP/M on the   
					disk’s system tracks.   
					Remove the copy of the CP/M master diskette from   
					the drive and insert the Elite Enhancements   
					Diskette. Type:   
					ENHANCE<RETURN>   
					Page 4—49   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once CP/M gets the ENHANCE utility loaded, the   
					utility will display:   
					ENHANCE   
					RANA Systems’ Enhancer for   
					Microsoft Us Apple ][ 56K CP/M BIOS   
					Copyright (C)(P) 7982 RANA Systems   
					Version 1.1   
					BIOS Image   
					Primary Copyright 1981 Microsoft   
					Portions Copyright 1982 RANA Systems   
					Insert a *COPY* of your Microsoft 56K CP/M   
					2.2 distribution diskette into drive A:.   
					Please do *NOT* insert your original   
					diskette from Microsoft.   
					Press <RETURN> when diskette inserted and   
					ready to be enhanced. Press any other key to   
					terminate this program without enhancing the   
					diskette.   
					After that mouthful has finished displaying,   
					reinsert the copy of the CP/M master diskette   
					into the drive and type:   
					<RETURN>   
					ENHANCE will go out and replace those sections   
					of the original Microsoft 56K CP/M with that   
					information which is necessary to use the ad-   
					vanced features of the Rana Elite products.   
					Page 4-50   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once ENHANCE is finished, it will display:   
					Enhancing completed. Press <RETURN>   
					to reboot system from slot #6.   
					Since you will want to start playing with the   
					enhanced CP/M right away, press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and ENHANCE will re-boot the enhanced CP/M sys-   
					tem.   
					The first enhancement you will notice on the   
					enhanced CP/M is the additional Rana Systems   
					copyright notice right below Microsoft’s. This   
					is an easy way to make sure you have booted an   
					enhanced CP/M.   
					In order to complete the enhanced CP/M master   
					diskette, you will need to move the enhanced   
					utilities onto the master diskette from the   
					Enhancements diskette. The standard CP/M PIP   
					utility is designed for this little task. (PIP   
					stands for “Peripheral Interchange Program”.)   
					However, PIP does not understand a single drive   
					copy. Therefore, your Enhancer diskette in-   
					cludes a special utility which will assist PIP   
					in that area. But first, in order to make room   
					for the new utilities on the master diskette, it   
					will be necessary to remove the old ones first.   
					Page 4—51   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Type the following three CP/M commands. After   
					each command, CP/M will simply respond with   
					“A>”.   
					ERA FORMAT. COM <RETURN>   
					ERA COPY. COM<RETURN>   
					ERA RW13.COM<RETURN>   
					These three commands ERAsed the old FORMAT and   
					COPY utilities, along with the little used (but   
					still useful) utility RW13. RW13 was erased to   
					make room for the SGLDRIVE utility on the al-   
					ready packed Disk ][ capacity CP/M master disk-   
					ette.   
					Now, to copy the new utilities onto the enhanced   
					CP/M master, insert the Enhancements diskette   
					into the drive, and then type:   
					SGLDRIVE<RETURN>   
					SGLDRIVE is PIP’s assist utility which makes   
					CP/M (and therefore PIP) think that your one   
					drive is actually two drives. SGLDRIVE will   
					respond with:   
					Enhanced Apple ][ CP/M   
					Dual to Single Drive Mapping Utility   
					Copyright (C) 7982 RANA Systems   
					Revision 1. 1   
					B: now mapped to A:   
					Mount A:, Press <ESC>   
					Page 4-52   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The final "mount" message comes from the section   
					of SGLDRIVE which is left in memory as part of   
					the operating system (CP/M) after the bulk of   
					SGLDRIVE goes away. This extra little “resi-   
					dent” section of SGLDRIVE does not consume any   
					of the user’s memory. It is loaded into that   
					section of the operating system which is only   
					required if you have more than one drive. And,   
					since you don’t have more than one drive (other-   
					wise you wouldn’t he running SGLDRIVE), this   
					section of the operating system can he used for   
					other purposes.   
					Once this “resident” portion of SGLDRIVE is   
					loaded, CP/M as an operating system will begin   
					recognizing two different drives (A: and B:),   
					even though you only have the one physical drive   
					attached to your Apple. SGLDRIVE “fools” CP/M   
					into seeing another drive by constantly watching   
					which drive CP/M (and standard programs running   
					under CP/M, such as PIP) is trying to talk to at   
					any particular time. Whenever CP/M changes from   
					trying to talk to drive A: to trying to talk to   
					drive B:, SGLDRIVE displays the message:   
					Mount B:, Press <ESC>   
					This gives you a chance to remove the diskette   
					which CP/M thinks is the one in drive A:, and   
					insert the diskette which CP/M thinks is in   
					drive B:. Once you press:   
					Page 4—53   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					SGLDRIVE converts CP/M’s request to read or   
					write on drive B: into a request to do the same   
					read or write on drive A: (which now has the   
					“phoney” drive B:’s diskette in it). Along the   
					same lines, whenever CP/M changes from talking   
					to drive B: back to talking to drive A:,   
					SGLDRIVE displays the message:   
					Mount A:, Press <ESC>   
					This give you a chance to remove the “phoney”   
					drive B: diskette and reinsert drive A:’s disk-   
					ette. Once you’ve changed the diskettes, press:   
					and CP/M will be allowed to continue. If you are   
					already starting to envision grand and glorious   
					things for SGLDRIVE to do for you, it is   
					suggested that you check the section later in   
					this manual which deals strictly with SGLDRIVE   
					itself. It explains some of the drawbacks and   
					problems which can arise when using SGLDRIVE   
					with certain types of programs. For now,   
					SGLDRIVE is going to help you with the problem   
					of PIP not being able to copy files between two   
					different diskettes using one drive.   
					SGLDRIVE will still be sitting there waiting for   
					you to insert the diskette for drive A:, so   
					insert the enhanced CP/M master diskette and   
					type:   
					Page 4-54   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					CP/M will respond with it’s “A>”. Now issue the   
					following four commands. After each command has   
					completed, CP/M will respond with it’s “A>”   
					prompt. Whenever SGLDRIVE asks you to “mount   
					B:”, you should insert the Enhancer diskette and   
					then press <ESC>. When SGLDRIVE asks you to   
					“mount A:”, you should insert the enhanced CP/M   
					master diskette and then press <ESC>.   
					PIP A: =B:FORMAT.COM[V] <RETURN>   
					PIP A: =B:COPY.COM[V]<RETURN>   
					PIP A: =B:PROFILE.COM[V] <RETURN>   
					PIP A: =B:SGLDRIVE.COM[V]<RETURN>   
					If you are a first time Apple CP/M user, the “[“   
					character is produced by typing <CTRL-K>, and   
					the "]" character is produced by typing <SHIFT-   
					N>. The Apple keyboard is not marked with (at   
					least one of) these characters. If you are   
					using a special keyboard modification or 80—   
					column board, you will probably need to consult   
					the manual for that product concerning special   
					keyboard characters under CP/M.   
					These commands told the PIP utility to copy the   
					specified files from drive B: to drive A: and to   
					verify that the files made it there correctly   
					(“[V]").   
					The next step is to create a system diskette   
					which gives you the full storage capability of   
					your drive. If the only Elite product you have   
					is the Elite Controller, then you are finished.   
					The rest of these instructions deal with the   
					configuring of the enhanced CP/M to make use of   
					the extra storage of an Elite Series drive.   
					Page 4—55   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The first step in creating a system diskette for   
					your higher capacity Elite drive is to format a   
					diskette for the drive to use when it starts   
					operating in a higher capacity way. Since you   
					now have an enhanced CP/M, you can now run the   
					new FORMAT utility in order to create these   
					higher capacity diskettes. To get the new   
					FORMAT started, type:   
					FORMAT<RETURN>   
					Once CP/M loads it in, FORMAT will respond with:   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Formatter   
					Primary Copyright 1980 Microsoft   
					Portions Copyright 1982 RANA Systems   
					RANA Systems Version 1. 1   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					In order to create a higher capacity diskette,   
					you will need to choose, from the following   
					table, whatever type of format would he suitable   
					for your drive:   
					0 - Apple Disk ][   
					1 - RANA Elite One   
					2 - RANA Elite Two   
					( 35 tracks)   
					( 40 tracks)   
					( 80 tracks)   
					3 - RANA Elite Three (160 tracks)   
					Page 4—56   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once you have the drive type number from the   
					table, type (without <RETURN>):   
					A:   
					followed by the drive type number. For example,   
					if you have an Elite Two, you would type:   
					A:2   
					If you have an Elite One, you would type:   
					A:1   
					And, if you have an Elite Three, you would type:   
					A:3   
					You should be careful to specify the correct   
					drive type for your drive. FORMAT cannot always   
					catch that the drive was unable to handle the   
					type of format you requested. The disk will   
					appear to be correctly formatted but will cause   
					a CP/M Disk I/O error or BDOS error at some   
					later stage, or your new CP/M may not boot.   
					Once you’ve specified the formatting informa-   
					tion, type:   
					<RETURN>   
					FORMAT will respond with:   
					Insert disk to be formatted in drive A:   
					Press RETURN to begin   
					Page 4—57   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Insert that second blank diskette which was   
					mentioned earlier, then type:   
					<RETURN>   
					FORMAT will respond with:   
					Formatting...   
					The drive will chatter and spin for almost a   
					minute, (or two if formatting an Elite Two or   
					Three diskette), then the screen will display:   
					FORMAT Complete   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					To end the FORMAT utility, press:   
					<RETURN>   
					without specifying any drive information. Once   
					again FORMAT will remember that you had to re-   
					move the enhanced CP/M master diskette in order   
					to insert the blank diskette to be formatted, so   
					it will say:   
					Insert CP/M System disk in drive A:   
					Press RETURN   
					Remove the just formatted diskette and reinsert   
					the enhanced CP/M master diskette. Then press:   
					<RETURN>   
					CP/M will eventually respond with “A>”.   
					Page 4—58   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Before you can copy the system onto the new   
					diskette in the correct format, you will need to   
					define for the enhanced CP/M a drive which can   
					read and write in the higher capacity format.   
					This is accomplished using the PROFILE utility.   
					Just like the other utilities, get it started by   
					typing:   
					PROFILE<RETURN>   
					its “sign on” is:   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					Drive Configuration Utility   
					Copyright (C)(P) 1982 RANA Systems   
					Version 1. 1   
					* 
					There is alot more to this utility than what you   
					will make use of right now. For now, type   
					(without <RETURN>):   
					B:   
					followed by the drive type number you used ear-   
					lier during FORMAT.   
					For example, if your drive is an Elite Two you   
					would type:   
					B:2   
					Page 4—59   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once you’ve typed the drive type number, press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and PROFILE will respond with:   
					Was B: Apple Disk-][   
					Slow seek.   
					and:   
					or:   
					Now B: RANA Elite One, Medium seek.   
					Now B: RANA Elite Two, Fast seek.   
					or:   
					Now B: RANA Elite Three, Fast seek.   
					followed by:   
					Ready to update in-memory system. <RETURN>   
					to continue/retry; <ESC> or <CTRL-C> to   
					abort.   
					Since you, no doubt, entered the command cor-   
					rectly and received the response which would be   
					correct for whichever type of drive you have,   
					simply press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and PROFILE will update the currently operating   
					CP/M so that it recognizes the phoney drive B:   
					as whatever your drive should be. This gets a   
					Page 4-60   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					little confusing since drive B:, when using   
					SGLDRIVE, will actually he drive A: (the only   
					drive you have). However, its actually not all   
					that complicated. Whenever CP/M goes to talk to   
					drive B:, it will think it is talking to a   
					higher capacity Elite Drive. SGLDRIVE will take   
					care of the fact that drive B: is actually drive   
					A: (with a different diskette inside). When CP/M   
					goes to talk to drive A:, it will think of it as   
					a Disk It. The only thing you need to worry   
					about is that when SGLDRIVE asks you to mount   
					the diskette for drive B:, you must put in the   
					diskette which was formatted for the higher   
					capacity. When SGLDRIVE requests the diskette   
					for drive A:, you must put in the enhanced CP/M   
					system master diskette. Let the system worry   
					about all the complicated details of dealing   
					with two different types of diskettes.   
					After PROFILE updates the CP/M system, it will   
					return to the asterisk (“*”) prompt. The next   
					thing that needs doing is a small assist for   
					SGLDRIVE. tAle to the way SGLDRIVE functions,   
					you will also need to redefine drive D: (another   
					drive you don’t actually have) the same way you   
					redefined drive B:. So, if you’re an Elite One   
					user, type:   
					D:1<RETURN>   
					If you’re an Elite Two user, type:   
					D:2<RETURN>   
					Page 4-61   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					and of course, if you’re an Elite Three user,   
					type:   
					D:3<RETURN>   
					PROFILE will then go through all the same steps   
					it did when you redefined drive B:, except this   
					time it will apply to drive D:. Once you get   
					back to the asterisk (“*”) prompt, type (without   
					<RETURN>):   
					<CTRL-C>   
					to get out of PROFILE. CP/M will respond with   
					“A>”.   
					Unlike Apple DOS’s “INIT” command, CP/M’s FORMAT   
					does not place a copy of the operating system   
					(in this case, CP/M) onto the newly formatted   
					diskette. This task is left up to the COPY   
					utility, which will place a copy of CP/M onto an   
					existing diskette without altering any other   
					information on the diskette. Since that is what   
					you will want to do now, type:   
					COPY<RETURN>   
					to get the new COPY utility running.   
					Page 4-62   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once it’s loaded, it will respond with:   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Copy Utility   
					Primary Copyright 1980 Microsoft   
					Portions Copyright 1982 RANA Systems   
					RANA Systems Version 1. 1   
					* 
					Once again, the “*” signals that COPY is ready   
					for a command. This time, however, the command   
					will be slightly different. Type:   
					B: =A :/5<RETURN>   
					This command tells COPY to copy the CP/M system   
					which is on the diskette in drive A: to the   
					diskette in drive B: without altering any other   
					information on the diskette in drive B:. Of   
					course, there is no drive B:, but SGLDRIVE will   
					take care of the problem for you. Right away,   
					SGLDRIVE will catch COPY requesting information   
					from drive B:, so it will allow you to change   
					diskettes by saying:   
					Mount B:, Press <ESC>   
					Once you’ve changed the diskette in the drive   
					from the enhanced CP/M master to the higher   
					capacity formatted diskette, press:   
					<ESC>   
					Page 4-63   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Since COPY knows nothing of this little diskette   
					change that occurred, it will respond with:   
					Insert SOURCE disk into drive A:   
					Insert TARGET disk into drive B:   
					Press RETURN to begin   
					With SGLDRIVE running, this message is basically   
					redundant, so just press:   
					<RETURN>   
					SGLDRIVE will then request:   
					Mount A:, Press <ESC>   
					Change the diskette in the drive back to the   
					enhanced CP/M master and press:   
					SGLDRIVE will then allow COPY to proceed with   
					reading the CP/M system off of the enhanced CP/M   
					master diskette. When COPY changes to trying to   
					write the enhanced CP/M to the higher capacity   
					diskette, SGLDRIVE will request:   
					Mount B:, Press <ESC>   
					Insert the higher capacity diskette into the   
					drive and press:   
					Page 4-64   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					COPY will then continue by writing the enhanced   
					CP/M to the higher capacity diskette.   
					Once COPY is finished, it will inform you of   
					that fact by saying:   
					COPY Complete   
					Do you wish to make another copy?   
					Just like last time, simply type (no <RETURN> is   
					necessary):   
					N 
					Since drive A: was used as one of the drives   
					during the copy, COPY will remind you to re-   
					insert the CP/M master diskette back into drive   
					A: by saying:   
					Insert CP/M System disk into drive A:   
					Hit RETURN   
					Go ahead and remove the higher capacity disk-   
					ette, then insert the enhanced CP/M master. Once   
					its in the drive, press:   
					<RETURN>   
					Since the last diskette SGLDRIVE requested you   
					place in the drive was the diskette for drive   
					B:, it will request that you mount the drive A:   
					diskette once CP/M goes to use it:   
					Mount A:, Press <ESC>   
					Page 4—65   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					The enhanced CP/M master is already in the drive   
					in response to COPY’s request for it, SO just   
					hit:   
					<ESC>   
					CP/M will finally respond with its “A>.   
					At this point in the procedure you have created   
					a diskette which will boot correctly (up to a   
					point) on your higher capacity drive in a higher   
					capacity way, but the CP/M system which is on   
					the diskette for that drive still thinks that   
					your drive is a Disk ][. This is because the   
					system you copied (the one on the enhanced mas-   
					ter diskette) was still treating drive A: as a   
					Disk ][. To remedy this problem, get back into   
					PROFILE by typing:   
					PROFILE<RETURN>   
					Again, the utility will “sign on” with:   
					Apple ][ CP/M   
					Drive Configuration Utility   
					Copyright (c) (p) 1982 RANA Systems   
					Version 1.1   
					* 
					To change the setting for drive A: within that   
					system sitting on your higher capacity diskette,   
					type (without <RETURN>):   
					B:=A:   
					Page 4—66   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					What you’ve told PROFILE so far is that you are   
					interested in updating the CP/M system in drive   
					B: “B:=”) (with the help of SGLDRIVE), and the   
					change you wish to make is to drive A: (“A:).   
					However, you’ve yet to specify the change to be   
					made. Remember that drive type number you used   
					back in FORMAT and PROFILE? It’s time to type   
					that again.   
					Example:If your drive is an Elite Two (in which   
					case phoney drive B: would be defined as an   
					Elite Two right now), you would want to type:   
					B:=A:2   
					If your drive is an Elite One, type:   
					B:=A:1   
					and last, but certainly not least (by about   
					500,000 bytes of storage), an Elite Three would   
					be:   
					B:=A:3   
					Once you’ve entered the drive type number,   
					press:   
					<RETURN>   
					and PROFILE will respond with (again):   
					Insert a system disk in B:   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL-C> to abort.   
					Page 4—67   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Given that you entered the command correctly (of   
					course you did!), insert your higher capacity   
					diskette in the drive and press:   
					<RETURN>   
					Since PROFILE will then make an attempt to read   
					the information off of phoney drive B:, SGLDRIVE   
					will come back with:   
					Mount B:, Press <ESC>   
					SGLDRIVE is just doing it’s job, even though the   
					higher capacity diskette is already in the   
					drive. Just hit:   
					<ESC>   
					and PROFILE will read the configuration informa-   
					tion off of the higher capacity diskette and   
					then mutter something like:   
					Was A: Apple Disk-][, Slow seek.   
					then PROFILE will change to referencing some   
					drive A: information, so SGLDRIVE will request:   
					Mount A:, Press <ESC>   
					Once you’ve inserted the enhanced CP/M master,   
					press:   
					<ESC>   
					Page 4-68   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					and PROFILE will continue with:   
					Now A: RANA Elite One, Medium seek.   
					Now A: RANA Elite Two, Fast seek.   
					Now A: RANA Elite Three, Fast seek.   
					or:   
					or:   
					and always:   
					Ready to update B:.   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL—C> to abort.   
					The “Now” message you get will match the drive   
					type you specified. To update the CP/M system   
					on your higher capacity diskette, insert the   
					higher capacity diskette and type:   
					<RETURN>   
					PROFiLE will then attempt to write the new con-   
					figuration to the higher capacity diskette,   
					which SGLDRIVE does not know you’ve put in the   
					diskette, so you’ll get:   
					Mount A:, Press <ESC>   
					Page 4-69   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Since the diskette is already inserted, press:   
					<ESC>   
					and PROFILE will continue by writing out the new   
					configuration.   
					When its finished, it will return to the aster-   
					isk (“*”) prompt.   
					To get out of PROFILE, insert the enhanced CP/M   
					master into the drive and type:   
					<CTRL—C>   
					SGLDRIVE will catch the change in drives and do   
					its little:   
					Mount A:, Press <ESC>   
					The enhanced CP/M master is already inserted, so   
					just type:   
					<ESC>   
					CP/M will then respond with its “MA>” prompt. To   
					complete your higher capacity system diskette,   
					you’ll need to copy the CP/M distribution files   
					(from Microsoft and Rana) onto the higher capa-   
					city diskette from the enhanced CP/M master. You   
					should read ahead at this point (if you’re not   
					already doing so) up to the point where PIP   
					finishes what it is about to do. This next step   
					is a little involved (but not complicated), so   
					you’ll want to know what’s coming up.   
					Page 4—70   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Once you’re done reading, type:   
					PIP B:=A: *.*[V]<RETURN>   
					This command first tells PIP to copy all files   
					on drive A: (“A:*.*”) to drive B: (“B:=”) and   
					verify that they made it correctly (“[V]”).   
					Since PIP will be doing a whole bunch of files,   
					it will display the name of each file as it is   
					copied. PIP must be used to copy each file one   
					at a time since the two diskettes are of a   
					different type and the files must be written to   
					the diskette according to the diskette’s type.   
					COPY will not rearrange files into different   
					arrangements according to the diskette’s type.   
					PIP will require alot of diskette changes, which   
					SGLDRIVE will catch and request:   
					Mount A:, Press <ESC>   
					or:   
					Mount B:, Press <ESC>   
					Whenever SGLDRIVE requests diskette A:, insert   
					the enhanced CP/M master. When diskette B: is   
					requested, insert the higher capacity diskette.   
					To be safe, you should place a write protect tab   
					over the enhanced CP/M master’s write protect   
					notch so that that diskette cannot be written   
					upon. This will insure that the diskette will   
					not be "destroyed” should you accidentally for-   
					get to exchange the diskettes.   
					Page 4—71   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Amidst all of these very abundant “mount” re-   
					quests from SGLDRIVE, PiP will report the name   
					of each file as it begins copying the file.   
					There are alot of files on the CP/M distribution   
					diskette (and thus on the enhanced CP/M master),   
					so there will be alot of diskette changes; but   
					without SGLDRIVE, this little single drive file—   
					by—file copy would be impossible. And, without   
					this copy, creating a higher capacity system   
					master would be impossible. Don’t fear though!   
					Once this higher capacity system master is   
					created, COPY can be used to duplicate it alot   
					faster, and with alot fewer diskette changes.   
					When PIP is finished, it will return to the CP/M   
					“A>” prompt.   
					Now you can turn your Apple off, and reboot the   
					system (just like you did at the beginning of   
					this whole process) using the higher capacity   
					diskette.   
					All the hard work is over. It’s time to enjoy!!   
					If you want to see the difference between a Disk   
					][’s capacity and your new Elite drive ‘s capa-   
					city (if you’re an Elite Two or Three user, this   
					will make your day), look up the:   
					STAT DSK:<RETURN>   
					command in your Microsoft CP/M manuals.   
					Page 4-72   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					For a Disk It drive, STAT will respond with the   
					following:   
					A: Drive Characteristics   
					1024: 128 Byte Record Capacity   
					128: Kilobyte Drive Capacity   
					48: 32 Byte Directory Entries   
					48: Checked Directory Entries   
					128: Records/ Extent   
					8: Records/ Block   
					32: Sectors/ Track   
					3: Reserved Tracks   
					The drive capacity in records and kilobytes is   
					what will primarily interest you. Also, a quick   
					explanation: the 32 sectors/track is correct.   
					When Apple talks about 16 sectors/track, they   
					are refering to a “sector which contains 256   
					bytes. When CP/M refers to a sector, it is   
					refering to a "sector" of .128 bytes. Microsoft   
					(and thus Rana) handles this small difference in   
					interpretation of a sector” by packing two CP/M   
					sectors into every Apple sector (2 times 128   
					equals 256). Therefore Microsoft gets twice as   
					many (smaller) CP/M sectors on every track (32)   
					as Apple does (16). The actual way sectors” are   
					read and written from/to a diskette is iden-   
					tical between Microsoft CP/M, Apple DOS 3.3, and   
					Apple Pascal 1.1. This means that all three   
					systems can read and write the remaining two   
					systems’ diskettes, but they generally do not   
					understand the information which the other two   
					systems’ place within the “sectors”.   
					Page 4-73   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					CP/M ENHANCEMENTS   
					Re me mbe r , whe n i t c ome s t o t he ne w Ra na ve r s i on   
					of t he FORMAT a nd COPY ut i l i t i e s , t he i ns t r uc -   
					t i ons i n t hi s ma nua l a r e i nt e nde d t o r e pl a c e   
					t hos e i ns t r uc t i ons gi ve n i n t he ve r y i nf or ma t i ve   
					Mi c r os of t CP/ M ma nua l s .   
					Page 4-74   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SECTION 5   
					5. SECTION 5   
					This section has been intentionally omitted.   
					Page 5—1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SECTION 5   
					This page intentionally left blank.   
					Page 5—2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					6. SPECIFICATIONS   
					6.1. Introduction   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					This section of the manual provides specifica-   
					tions for the entire Elite Series of products.   
					Most off the information is of a highly technical   
					nature, so it may or may not he of interest to   
					you.   
					At this stage, the general user should know that   
					familiarity with the technical information to   
					follow is not required to obtain the best per-   
					formance from any Elite Series product.   
					Page 6-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Capacity   
					163K Bytes   
					Track to Track Access Tune 15ms   
					Maximum Access Time   
					Average Access Time   
					Number of Heads   
					450ms   
					150ms   
					1 
					Number of Cylinders   
					Number of Tracks   
					40   
					40   
					Number of Sectors/Track   
					Track Density   
					Rotational Speed   
					Recording Frequency   
					Recording Density   
					Inside Track Maximums   
					16   
					48 TPI   
					295 RPM   
					250 KHZ   
					5536 FCI   
					4429 BPI   
					Weight   
					5 lbs 4 oz   
					Reliability   
					MTBF   
					M72TR   
					9200 Hours   
					.5 Hours   
					Design Life   
					Soft Error Rate   
					Hard Error Rate   
					Seek Error Rate   
					Media   
					Interface   
					Average Latency   
					Motor Start Time   
					5 
					Years   
					1 in lOe+09 Bits   
					1 in lOe#12 Bits   
					1 in lOe#06 Steps   
					ANSI Std. 5.25" Disk   
					Disk II Compatible   
					lOOms   
					O.5s   
					Fig. 6-1: Elite One Characteristics   
					Page 6-2   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Power Requirements   
					+5 VDC Standby   
					+5 VDC Active   
					35mA   
					50mA   
					40mA   
					300mA   
					450mA   
					+12 VDC Standby   
					+12 VDC Active   
					+12 VDC Surge   
					Operating Temp.   
					Non operating Temp.   
					Operating Humidity   
					Nonoperating Humidity   
					Max Wet Bulb   
					40F - 115F   
					-40F - 160F   
					20% - 80% (nancond.)   
					5% - 95% (noncond.)   
					85F   
					Fig. 6-2: Elite One Characteristics (cont.)   
					Specifications are approximations based on in-   
					dustry standard testing. They are not based on an   
					Elite One operating under the standard Apple   
					II operating systems and hardware, and are also   
					not best/worst case.   
					Page 6—3   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Capacity   
					326K Bytes   
					Track to Track Access Time 5ms   
					Maximum Access Time   
					Average Access Time   
					Number of Heads   
					Number of Cylinders   
					Number of Tracks   
					210ms   
					84ms   
					2 
					40   
					80   
					Number of Sectors/Track   
					Track Density   
					Rotational Speed   
					Recording Frequency   
					Recording Density   
					Inside Track Maximums   
					16   
					48 TPI   
					295 RPM   
					250 KHZ   
					5876 FCI   
					4700 BPI   
					5 lbs 4 oz   
					Weight   
					Reliability   
					MTBF   
					9200 Hours   
					MTTR   
					.5 Hours   
					Design Life   
					Soft Error Rate   
					Hard Error Rate   
					Seek Error Rate   
					Media   
					Interface   
					Average Latency   
					Motor Start Time   
					5 Years   
					1 in l0e+09 Bits   
					1 in 10e+12 Bits   
					1 in l0e+06 Steps   
					ANSI Std. 5.25 Disk   
					Disk II Compatible   
					l00ms   
					0.5s   
					Fig. 6-3: Elite Two Characteristics   
					Page 6-4   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Power Requirements   
					+5 VDC Standby   
					+5 VDC Active   
					35mA   
					50mA   
					40mA   
					300mA   
					450mA   
					+12 VDC Standby   
					+12 VDC Active   
					+12 VDC Surge   
					Operating Temp.   
					Nonoperating Temp.   
					Operating Humidity   
					Nonoperating Humidity   
					Max Wet Bulb   
					40F - 115F   
					-40F - 160F   
					2O% - 8O% (noncond.)   
					5% - 95% (non cond.)   
					85F   
					Fig. 6-4: Elite Two Characteristics (cont.)   
					Specifications are approximations based on in-   
					dustry standard testing. They are not based on   
					an Elite Two operating under the standard Apple   
					II operating systems and hardware, and are also   
					not best/worst case.   
					Page 6-5   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Capacity   
					652K Bytes   
					Track to Track Access Time 5ms   
					Maximum Access Time   
					Average Access Time   
					Number of Heads   
					420ms   
					l50ms   
					2 
					Number of Cylinders   
					Number of Tracks   
					80   
					160   
					Number of Sectors/Track   
					Track Density   
					Rotational Speed   
					Recording Frequency   
					Recording Density   
					Inside Track Maximums   
					16   
					96 TPI   
					295 RPM   
					250 KHZ   
					5922 FCI   
					4737 BPI   
					5 lbs 4 oz   
					Weight   
					Reliability   
					MTBF   
					9200 Hours   
					MTTR   
					.5   
					Hours   
					Design Life   
					Soft Error Rate   
					Hard Error Rate   
					Seek Error Rate   
					Media   
					Interface   
					Average Latency   
					Motor Start Time   
					5 Years   
					1 in 10e+09 Bits   
					1 in 10e+12 Bits   
					1 in lOe+06 Steps   
					ANSI Std. 5.25” Disk   
					Disk II Compatible   
					lOOms   
					0.5s   
					Fig. 6-5: Elite Three Characteristics   
					Page 6-6   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Power Requirements   
					+5 VDC Standby   
					35mA   
					+5 VDC Active   
					50mA   
					+12 VDC Standby   
					+12 VDC Active   
					+12 VDC Surge   
					40mA   
					300mA   
					450mA   
					40F— 115F   
					Operating Temp.   
					Nonoperating Temp.   
					Operating Humidity   
					Nonoperating Humidity   
					Max Wet Bulb   
					-40F - 160F   
					2O% - 8O% (noncond.)   
					5%-95% (noncond.)   
					85F   
					Fig. 6-6: Elite Three Characteristics (cont.)   
					Specifications are approximations based on in-   
					dustry standard testing. They are not based on   
					an Elite Three operating under the standard   
					Apple II operating systems and hardware, and are   
					also not best/worst case.   
					Page 6-7   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Interfacing Capability   
					PROM Sizes   
					4 Drives   
					6502 Boot Logic   
					State Machine   
					GCR Data Frequency   
					Weight   
					2K Bytes   
					256/512 Bytes   
					250 KHZ   
					1 lb   
					Reliability   
					MTBF   
					35,000 Hours   
					MTTR   
					.25   
					Hours   
					Design Life   
					10 Years   
					Interface   
					System   
					Apple II Bus   
					Drives   
					Disk II Compatible   
					Power Req. (excluding drives)   
					+5 VDC Standby   
					+5 VDC Active   
					Operating Temp.   
					Non operating Temp.   
					Operating Humidity   
					Non operating Humidity   
					Max Wet Bulb   
					140mA   
					340mA   
					40F — 115F   
					-40F - 160F   
					20% - 80% (noncond.)   
					5% — 95% (noncond.)   
					85F   
					Fig. 6-7: Elite Controller Characteristics   
					Specifications are approximations based on in-   
					dustry standard testing. They are not based on an   
					Elite Controller operating under the standard   
					Apple II operating systems and hardware, and are   
					also not best/worst case.   
					Page 6-8   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					6.2. Mechanical Dimensions   
					The following two figures give the physical   
					dimensions of the Elite Series drives and the   
					Elite Controller.   
					Page 6-9   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Fig. 6-8: Physical Dimensions of Elite Drives   
					Page 6—10   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Fig. 6-9: Elite Controller Physical Dimensions   
					Page 6-11   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					6.3 Controller to Drive Interface   
					Pin Number Signal (originates)   
					1 
					Ground   
					2 
					+ Stepper Motor Phase A (ctlr)   
					3 
					Ground   
					4 
					+ Stepper Motor Phase B (ctlr)   
					5 
					Ground   
					6 
					+ Stepper Motor Phase C (ctlr)   
					7 
					Ground   
					8 
					+ Stepper Motor Phase D (ctlr)   
					9 
					Not Connected   
					10   
					11   
					12   
					13   
					14   
					15   
					16   
					17   
					18   
					19   
					20   
					- Activate Writing (ctlr)   
					+5v   
					+5v   
					+12V   
					— Select Drive (ctlr)   
					+12V   
					+/— Read Data (drive)   
					+12V   
					+/— Write Date (ctlr)   
					+12V   
					+ Write Protect (drive)   
					Fig. 6-10: Controller to Drive Interface Signals   
					Page 6—12   
					 
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					The Elite drives/controller interface can be   
					divided into two categories:   
					1.Signal.   
					2. Power.   
					The following sections provide the electrical   
					definition for each line.   
					Refer to the preceding figure for all interface   
					connections. Timing diagrams for the signals   
					are provided in the Elite Series Service Manual.   
					6.4. Signal Interface   
					The signal interface consists of two categories:   
					1.Control.   
					2. Data transfer.   
					All lines in the signal interface are digital   
					and originate in either the drive (to control-   
					ler) or on the controller (to drive) via the   
					interface cable.   
					Page 6—13   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					6.4.1. Control Signals   
					AU control signals originate at the controller,   
					and are of two types: those intended to be   
					multiplexed in a multiple drive system, and one   
					which will perform the multiplexing.   
					Drive Select   
					The input signal intended to do the multiplexing   
					is the drive selection signal. Although stand-   
					ard Apple II—type minifloppy drives are not   
					daisy-chained on a cable like most other sys-   
					tems, the majority off the input/output signals   
					passing between the drives and the controller are   
					wire -0Red together on the controller card inside   
					the Apple making multiplexing of signals   
					necessary.   
					The drive select signal is the only signal which   
					is not shared between all drives attached to the   
					same controller card. The controller has a   
					separate drive select line for each drive for   
					which is it capable of controlling.   
					The Drive Select line provides a means of se-   
					lecting and deselecting the individual disk   
					drives. When this signal is low, that portion of   
					the disk drive electronics which are normally   
					powered down (Elite drives) are activated. The   
					spindle drive motor is turned on, the busy light   
					is illuminated, and the drive is conditioned to   
					respond to step or read/write commands.   
					Page 6—14   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					When this signal is high, the drive motor and   
					the busy light are turned off, the input control   
					and the output status lines are disabled, and   
					unused sections of the drive’s electronics   
					(Elite series) are powered down.   
					There is an intentional delay incorporated on   
					both the Elite and Disk II controller cards   
					which keeps a drive selected for a little over   
					one second after the software gives the command   
					to deselect the drive. This allows the software   
					to “reselect” the drive within that period with-   
					out having to wait for the motor to return to   
					operational speed.   
					This delay must be taken into account when the   
					software goes to select a drive on a different   
					controller card so that only one drive is power-   
					ed-up at any one time (an Apple II power supply   
					consideration). (The same consideration is   
					necessary when another device, such as Apple’s   
					Silentype printer, which draws power from the   
					Apple II power supply is to be selected.) No   
					pause is required when selecting an alternate   
					drive on the same controller since both the   
					Elite and Disk II controllers will immediately   
					deselect the previous drive when the new drive   
					is selected.   
					The select line must remain low throughout the   
					execution of a step or read/write command. After   
					the drive is selected, there must be a 500ms   
					delay before a write operation is initiated.   
					This 500ms delay allows the drive motor to come   
					up to speed. This delay is handled by the Apple   
					II operating systems.   
					Page 6-15   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					Although a newly selected drive will not return   
					valid data until the motor comes up to speed,   
					the software need not incorporate any timing   
					delays before attempting a read provided the   
					motor-on time is taken into account in any retry   
					logic. Since a 500ms motor-on time is a maximum,   
					the system software can usually shorten the   
					delay by sampling the drive’s returned data   
					until valid data begins to appear.   
					Stepper Motor Phase Selection   
					In order to move the read/write head, each of   
					the four phases of the stepper motor (A-D) must   
					be turned on then off again in a certain se-   
					quence. Each phase is activated/deactivated in   
					direct response to the stepper motor p~ase con-   
					trol interface signals being set logically   
					high/low respectively. If the stepper motor   
					phases are activated then deactivated in ascend-   
					ing order (A, B, C, D, A, etc), the arm is moved   
					inward. In descending order (A, D, C, B, A,   
					etc), the arm is moved outward. The timing be-   
					tween activation and deactivation of these sig-   
					nals is critical.   
					Activate Writing   
					The active state of this signal, or logical low,   
					enables the write data to be written on the   
					diskette. The inactive state, or logical high,   
					Page 6-16   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					completely disables the write logic and enables   
					the read data logic and stepper logic.   
					6.4.2. Data Signals   
					Read Data   
					This interface line returns to the controller   
					card the magnetic polarity of the section of the   
					diskette (side) which is currently passing under   
					the (selected) read/write head. When a section   
					of media with a particular magnetic polarity is   
					passing under the (selected) read/write head,   
					this interface line will be a logical low. When   
					a section of the media with an opposite polarity   
					is passing under the (selected) read/write head,   
					this line will be a logical high. The control-   
					ler cards are not as interested in the actual   
					logical level of this line as they are in a   
					change from one level to the other. Such a   
					transition signifies that a “1” bit was recorded   
					at that media location, lack of a transition   
					indicates a “0” bit.   
					Write Data   
					This interface line directly controls the cur-   
					rent flowing through the (selected) read/write   
					head. A logical high level on this line will   
					cause the (selected) read/write head to magnet—   
					Page 6-17   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					ize the disk (side) with a particular polarity.   
					A logical low level will cause the (selected)   
					read/write head to magnetize the disk (side)   
					using the opposite polarity. This line is only   
					enabled when the Activate Writing signal is   
					enabled. Write Data is inactive during a read   
					operation A Write Data clamp is provided with-   
					in the drive logic to hold the Write Data line   
					at a logical zero whenever Activate Writing is   
					inactive.   
					Write Protect   
					This interface signal is provided by the drive   
					to give the Apple an indication when the in-   
					stalled diskette is write protected. The signal   
					is a logical low level when it is protected.   
					The drive will inhibit writing with a protected   
					diskette installed in addition to notifying the   
					controller card.   
					Write protection can be in the form of either a   
					diskette with a label covering the write protect   
					notch (physical write protection), or the front   
					panel write protect switch being set on the   
					Elite Series drives (logical write protection).   
					6.5. Power Interface   
					Both the Elite Series and Disk II drives require   
					only DC power for operation, which is drawn from   
					the Apple II computer through the controller   
					Page 6—18   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					card. The two DC voltages, their specifica-   
					tions and their interface pin designators are   
					given in various tables earlier in this section.   
					Page 6-19   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SPECIFICATIONS   
					This page intentionally left blank.   
					Page 6-20   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					7. OPERATIONAL THEORY OF ELITE PRODUCTS   
					7.1. Elite Drives   
					7.1.1.General Operation   
					The Elite Series drives consist of read/write,   
					control, and drive motor electronics; drive   
					mechanism; read/write head; and an advanced   
					track positioning mechanism. These components   
					perform the following functions:   
					1. Interpret and generate control signals.   
					2. Move the read/write head to the desired   
					track.   
					3. Read and write data.   
					4. Control drive motor speed.   
					5. Select between two heads (Elite Two and   
					Three).   
					Page 7-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					This page intentionally left blank.   
					Page 7—2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					7.1.2.Read/Write/Control Logic   
					The electronics are packaged on one PCB which   
					contains:   
					7.Read/write head positioning drivers.   
					2.Write current drivers.   
					3.Read amplifier and transition detectors.   
					4.Write protect detectors and latches   
					a. Diskette   
					b. Panel switch   
					5. Drive select circuits.   
					6. Drive motor control circuits.   
					7. Head selection detection and latch   
					circuits (Elite Two and Three).   
					7.1.3. Drive Mechanism   
					The drive motor operates on 12VDC and rotates   
					the spindle at 300 RPM through a belt—drive   
					system. The motor speed is controlled by a   
					feed—back from a tachometer inside the motor. A   
					registration hub clamp that moves in conjunction   
					with the door closure mechanism centers and   
					clamps the diskette onto the spindle hub.   
					Page 7-3   
					 
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					7.1.4. Head Positioning Mechanisms   
					An electrical stepping motor and an advanced   
					head positioning mechanism position the read/-   
					write head. Clockwise and counter-clockwise   
					rotations of the stepper motor are translated   
					into linear head movement via one off two mecha-   
					nisms discussed below. The Apple system software   
					increments the stepper motor to the desired   
					track by directly signalling the drive electron-   
					ics which stepper motor phases to power on and   
					off.   
					The stepper motor stator coils are organized in   
					four phases: A, B, C, and D. As each phase is   
					activated in turn, the motor rotates to align   
					with that coil, forcing the carriage to move one   
					“halftrack” (full track for Elite Three) posi-   
					tion. It the phases are activated in the order   
					A, B, C, D, A ... the head will step in. The   
					order D, C, B, A, D ... will cause the head to   
					step out.   
					Band Pulley Positioning   
					In- the Elite Two, Three, and some Elite Ones,   
					the stepper motor acts on a pulley to which is   
					attached a flexible, ultra thin band. One half   
					of this band has a slot through which the other   
					half passes after looping around the pulley.   
					The two band ends are secured to the main head   
					carriage at the inner and outer edges. Slack-   
					ness in the band or the motion of the mechanism   
					Page 7—4   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					is highly unlikely as the system is pre—ten—   
					sioned (reducing angular and linear inertia) to   
					allow greatly improved track to track access   
					times.   
					Lead Screw Positioning   
					In some Elite One designs, the stepper motor   
					rotates a lead screw. The four—start lead screw   
					is threaded through a type of "nut" which is   
					part of the read/write head carriage assembly.   
					As the stepper motor rotates, the linearly sta-   
					tionary lead screw forces the “nut” to move,   
					taking the read/write head carriage along with   
					it.   
					7.1.5. Read/Write Head   
					The Elite Series read/write heads are single   
					element, glass bonded ferrite/ceramic heads with   
					tunnel erase elements to provide erased areas   
					between data tracks. Thus, normal interchange   
					tolerances between media and drives will not   
					degrade the signal to noise ratio and insures   
					diskette interchangeability.   
					The read/write head is mounted on a carriage   
					assembly which moves on rails and is positioned   
					by one of the two mechanisms mentioned above.   
					The diskette is held in a plane perpendicular to   
					the read/write head by a platen located on the   
					base casting.   
					Page 7-5   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					This precision registration insures perfect   
					compliance with the read/write head. The disk-   
					ette is loaded against the head when the drive   
					door is closed. The read/write head is in di-   
					rect contact with the diskette, so the head   
					surface has been designed to obtain maximum   
					signal transfer to and from the magnetic surface   
					of the diskette with minimum friction and wear.   
					The Elite One contains a single head which is   
					positioned below the diskette, facing upward,   
					thus allowing it to read and write upon the   
					lower surface (surface opposite the diskette’s   
					label). A felt pressure pad is mounted on a   
					precision tensioned swing arm located opposite   
					the read/write head. This pad insures constant   
					contact of the diskette against the head. The   
					pad swings up and back when the door is opened   
					to permit insertion/removal of the diskette.   
					Although this pad is engineered for minimum   
					diskette wear, the pad is not designed to ride   
					on a diskette surface containing valid data.   
					Therefore, diskettes containing valid data on   
					both surfaces should not be used in single   
					headed drives such as the Elite One or Disk II.   
					The Elite Two and Elite Three drives contain two   
					heads which are oriented essentially opposite   
					each other on opposing sides of the diskette.   
					The lower head (head zero) is oriented identical   
					to the Elite One’s single head. The upper head   
					(head one) is mounted on a precision tensioned   
					swing arm, which is raised up and back when the   
					drive’s door is opened; thus allowing the disk-   
					ette to be inserted/removed.   
					Page 7-6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					7.2. Elite Controller   
					7.2.1. Introduction   
					The four disk drives allowed with each Elite   
					Controller card are grouped into two pairs with   
					drives 1 and 2 (Bank 0) selected when power is   
					first applied.   
					They may be addressed using the standard “Dl”   
					and D2” used by most Apple software. With a   
					special command to the controller to select Bank   
					1, drives 3 and 4 will respond as if they were   
					drives 1 and 2. An LED indicates when the   
					second bank (drives 3 and 4) is selected.   
					An EPROM, containing the Rana boot code, is   
					located on the controller card. The Rana boot   
					accommodates both the standard Apple 13 and 16   
					sector formats. The controller card is also   
					compatible with the special “copy protected” 16-   
					sect or boot formats since, in a general sense,   
					only the initial boot sector must be read by the   
					boot PROM. Following this, the user software   
					(or DOS) handles any special formats.   
					The EPROM is switched into and out of the per-   
					ipheral expansion space ($C800-CFFF) using the   
					protocol recommended by Apple. An LED, located   
					on the Controller Card, indicates when the Rana   
					boot EPROM is switched into the expansion space.   
					Page 7—7   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					7.2.2. Booting   
					The Rana boot code automatically detects the   
					format, whether 13 or 16 sector, and loads the   
					initial boot sector (track 0, sector 0).   
					On 13 sector booting, control is immediately   
					transferred to the second stage boot code   
					(loaded at $300—$3FF) via a jump to $301.   
					On 16 sector booting, the boot sector is loaded   
					at $800—$8FF. Following the load, byte $800 is   
					checked to find which other sectors are to be   
					loaded prior to transferring control to the   
					second stage. Any additional sectors will be   
					loaded in successive memory pages ($900, $AOO,   
					etc).   
					The standard DOS 3.3 second stage boot does not   
					require any additional sectors to be loaded   
					under the exclusive control of the boot PROM.   
					Once all the required sectors have been loaded,   
					the PROM transfers control to the second stage   
					boot code via a jump to $801.   
					Both the DOS 3.2.1 and DOS 3.3 second stage boot   
					routines re-enter the boot PROM in order to use   
					the sector reading code it contains.   
					DOS 3.2.1 re-enters the PROM at $Cn5D using a   
					6502 JSR which requires the PROM to perform an   
					RTS when completed.   
					Page 7-8   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					DOS 3.3 re-enters at $Cn5C using a 6502 JMP.   
					When the PROM is finished, the second stage   
					expects it to transfer control back, via a JMP,   
					to $801.   
					DOS 3.2.1 does not expect the boot PROM to try   
					to decode the data read on the later calls (the   
					boot sector is a special encoding scheme which   
					differs from the rest of a 13 sector disk).   
					However, DOS 3.3 does require the boot PROM to   
					decode on these later sectors.   
					NOTE: The Rana boot code adheres to all the   
					above standard Apple DOS booting protocols, and   
					to several extensions to this protocol in order   
					to support existing software packages.   
					7.2.3.Hardware   
					The Elite Controller Card has full data buffer-   
					ing, using a bi-directional bus driver, which   
					pro vides more drive than other controllers yet   
					requires very little drive from the bus. Exten-   
					sive power switching reduces the power consump-   
					tion of the data buffer and other circuits.   
					7.2.4.EPROM Logic   
					The EPROM is split into two sections ($000—$6FF   
					and $ 700-$7FF). Both sections are mapped into   
					$C800-$CFFF; however only the $000-$6FF section,   
					Page 7-9   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					which maps into $C800-$CEFF, is intended to be   
					used at this location. The second section is   
					mapped into the slot-dependent location in the   
					Apple memory as illustrated in the table below.   
					Slot Memory Address for EPROM ($700-$ 7FF)   
					0 
					1 
					2 
					3 
					4 
					5 
					6 
					7 
					(not allowed)   
					$C100—$C1FF   
					$C200—$C2FF   
					$C300—$C3FF   
					$C400—$C4FF   
					$C500—$C5FF   
					$C600—$C6FF   
					$C700—$C7FF   
					Fig. 7-2: Slot Dependent PROM Address Ranges   
					This slot dependent portion of the EPROM is   
					always there. The mapped-in section, at $C800—   
					$CFFF, is only there after an access to the slot   
					dependent area. However, before accessing the   
					expansion area a command must be given to turn   
					off all the other ROMS that might be on the bus   
					(an access at $CFFF) which also turns off the   
					Rana EPROM. When the expansion RCA area is map-   
					ped Out from within the slot dependent ROM code,   
					the following instruction fetch made by the 6502   
					will cause the Elite Controller’s RON to be   
					mapped back in. This allows the slot dependent   
					Page 7—10   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					code to map out all other controllers’ ROMs   
					without affecting itself.   
					This mapping of the 2K peripheral RCA space   
					($C800-$CFFF) is a convention maintained by   
					nearly all of the hardware and software develop-   
					ers.   
					The partitioning of the EPROM is performed by   
					u16 (7418257) and selection of the expansion   
					portion is done by U7 (74L574) and U16   
					(74LS257). Decoding of the off instruction is   
					performed by U15 (74LS30). A synchronous ap-   
					proach was taken to selection design because of   
					noise spikes on many of the bus interface lines.   
					7.2.5.State Machine   
					This consists of a program counter latch, a   
					control latch, and a condition matrix contained   
					in a 256/512 byte PROM. The present program   
					counter address (which is completely independent   
					from the 6502 central processor ‘s program count-   
					er) and the condition lines are the inputs to   
					the condition matrix PROM.   
					Separate state diagrams exist for every kind of   
					activity allowed by the controller. These   
					states are selected by two of the condition   
					lines.   
					Page 7—11   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					7.2.6. Addressable Latch   
					The addressable latch is used to store the oper—   
					ating mode of the controller including the se-   
					lected disk drive, the phase of the stepper   
					motor, the motor enable state, and the function   
					currently being performed.   
					7.2.7.Alternate Pair Select Logic   
					Selection of the second pair of disk drives is   
					accomplished by detecting a write to the periph-   
					eral expansion area which normally contains ROM.   
					The controller will only recognize the write if   
					its own EPROM is mapped in. This is to avoid   
					recognition of the pair select command for a   
					second controller card installed in the same   
					computer.   
					The select information is contained in address   
					line 0, thus (if this controller’s EPROM is   
					switched into $C800—$CFFF) a write to $C800 will   
					select Bank 0 (drives 1 and 2). A write to   
					$C801 will select Bank 1 (drives 3 and 4) a   
					condition which will be indicated by an LED.   
					7.2.8.Data Buffer/Internal Data Bus   
					The data buffer U13 (8304) is powered-on when-   
					ever a data transfer to or from the controller   
					card occurs. The internal data bus connects the   
					data buffer with the EPROM and the serial to   
					parallel converter U12 (74LS323). The outputs   
					Page 7-12   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					of the EPROM and the serial to parallel convert-   
					er are controlled to insure that no contention   
					ever occurs on the bus.   
					7.2.9. Controller Command Structure   
					The Elite Controller Card responds to three   
					types of commands. The first type is the device   
					command, characterized by bringing the DEV line   
					low as shown in the following table. (See the   
					Apple II Reference Manual for an explanation of   
					the DEV line.)   
					Slot   
					Memory Address for DEV   
					0 
					1 
					2 
					3 
					4 
					5 
					6 
					7 
					(not allowed)   
					$C090—$C09F   
					$C0A0-$C0AF   
					$C0B0-$C0BF   
					$C0C0-$C0CF   
					$C0L0-$C0DF   
					$C0E0-$C0EF   
					$C0F0-$C0FF   
					Fig. 7-3: DEV Line Address Ranges   
					Page 7—13   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					Each block of sixteen addresses permits eight   
					commands (on and off for each). These are:   
					Command   
					OFF   
					ON   
					Stepper Phase A   
					$C0n0 $C0n1   
					$C0n2 $C0n3   
					$C0n4 $C0n5   
					$C0n6 $C0n7   
					$C0n8 $C0n9   
					$C0nA $C0nB   
					B 
					C 
					D 
					Drive Motor Enable   
					Drive 1/2 Selec±   
					Function Select Bit 0 $C0nC $C0nD   
					Function Select Bit 1 $C0nE $C0nF   
					where n is a number from $9 to $F (slot +8) as   
					determined by the slot location of the card:   
					Slot Value of “n” in Command   
					0 
					1 
					2 
					3 
					4 
					5 
					6 
					7 
					(not allowed)   
					9 
					A 
					B 
					C 
					D 
					E 
					F 
					Fig. 7-4: Controller Command Addresses   
					Page 7—14   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					Function hits 0 and 1 determine the mode off the   
					controller:   
					Controller Mode   
					Bit 1 Bit 0   
					Read From Disk   
					Sense Write Protect   
					Write To Disk   
					0 
					0 
					1 
					1 
					0 
					1 
					0 
					1 
					Load Data Byte (Write)   
					Fig. 7-5: Controller Functions   
					Page 7-15   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					The second type of command is the bank select   
					command, characterized by a write by the Apple   
					CPU to the address space occupied by the con-   
					troller ‘S EPROM. The bank select commands are   
					only enabled when the controller’s EPROM is   
					switched into the peripheral expansion space.   
					An LED indicates when drives 3 and 4 (Bank 1)   
					are selected.   
					Address to Write   
					Drives Selected (data ignored)   
					1 and 2   
					3 and 4   
					$C800   
					$C801   
					(Writes to other addresses between $C800 and   
					$CFF7 are also possible but may not be supported   
					in later card revisions).   
					Fig. 7-6: Controller Bank Select Addresses   
					The third type of command is the EPROM switches.   
					These control whether the EPROM is enabled for   
					the $C800-CFFF peripheral expansion space. An   
					LED indicates when the EPROM is switched on.   
					EPROM Switch   
					Address to Access   
					Turn on at $C800-CFFF   
					Turn off EPROM   
					$Cn00-cnFF (n = slot #)   
					$CFF8-CFFF   
					Fig. 7-7: Controller EPROM Map-In/out Addresses   
					Page 7—16   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					7.2.10.   
					Power-On Reset   
					Unlike early Apple II computers, a power-on   
					reset circuit has been included to insure the   
					controller assumes the correct quiescent mode   
					when power is first applied. This is implement-   
					ed with a timer circuit that pulls the reset   
					line down in a “wire—or” fashion. After approxi—   
					mately 0.2 seconds, the reset line is released.   
					This circuit does not interfere with the normal   
					operation of the reset line.   
					7.2.11.Power Supply Decoupiing   
					All power supplies to the controller are bypass-   
					ed to ground on board, whether or not they are   
					used. This technique provides the best grounding   
					scheme for Apple II equipment and also reduces   
					noise on other bus lines.   
					Page 7—17   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					7.2.12. Direct Use of Disk Drives   
					It is often necessary to access the drives di-   
					rectly from assembly language, without the use   
					of DOS. This is done using a section of 16   
					addresses that are latched toggles, interfacing   
					directly to the hardware. There are eight two   
					byte toggles that essentially represent pulling   
					a TTL line high or low. Applications which   
					could use direct access range from a user writ-   
					ten operating system to DOS—independent utility   
					programs. Tbe device address assignments are   
					illustrated in the figure below.   
					The addresses are slot-dependent and the offsets   
					are computed by multiplying the slot number by   
					16. This works well in hexadecimal where $n0   
					(with n as the slot number) can be added to the   
					base address. To engage drive i in slot #6, add   
					$60 to $C08A (device address assignment for   
					engaging drive 1) for a result of $COBA. How-   
					ever, for code that is not slot dependent use   
					$CO8A,x (where the x register contains the value   
					$n0).   
					In general, the addresses in the figure below   
					need only be accessed with any valid 6502 com-   
					mand. When reading and writing bytes, ensure the   
					data is in the appropriate register. All the   
					following engage Drive 1 (assume slot #6).   
					LDA $COEA   
					BIT $CO8A,x (where X-reg contains $60)   
					CMP $C08A,X (where X-reg contains $60)   
					Page 7—18   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					ADDRESS LABEL   
					DESCRIPTION   
					$C0B0   
					$C081   
					$C082   
					$C083   
					$C084   
					$C084   
					$C085   
					$C086   
					$C086   
					$C087   
					$C088   
					$C089   
					$C08A   
					$C08B   
					$C08C   
					$C08D   
					$C08C   
					$C08D   
					PHSOOF   
					PHSOON   
					PBSlOF   
					PHS1ON   
					PHS2OF   
					PHS2ON   
					PHS3OF   
					PHS3ON   
					PHS4OF   
					PHS4ON   
					MTROFF   
					MTRON   
					DRVOEN   
					DRV1EN   
					Q6L   
					Stepper Phase 0 Off   
					Stepper Phase 0 On   
					Stepper Phase 1 Off   
					Stepper Phase 1 On   
					Stepper Phase 2 Off   
					Stepper Phase 2 On   
					Stepper Phase 3 Off   
					Stepper Phase 3 On   
					Stepper Phase 4 Off   
					Stepper Phase 4 On   
					Turn Motor Off   
					Turn Motor On   
					Engage Drive 1   
					Engage Drive 2   
					Strobe Latch for I/O   
					Load Data Latch   
					Q6H   
					Q7L   
					Q7R   
					Prepare Latch/Input   
					Prepare Latch/Output   
					Q7L after Q6L = Read   
					Q7L after Q6H = Sense Write Protect   
					Q7N after QEL = Write   
					Q7H after Q6M = Load Write Latch   
					Page 7-19   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					The following are typical examples of the use of   
					device address assignments (slot #6 is assumed   
					and the X-reg contains $60).   
					Stepper Phase Off/On   
					Each of the four phases (0-3) must be turned on   
					and off again. In ascending order, the arm is   
					moved inward, in descending order the ann is   
					moved outward. The timing between accesses to   
					these locations is critical and the SEEK command   
					in RWTS should be used to move the arm.   
					The following example assumes the drive is al-   
					ready selected, motor on, not in write mode, and   
					has two stepper motor phases per track (standard   
					for the Elite One, Elite Two, and Disk II), and   
					it will move the head from the source track   
					SRCTRK to destination track DSTTRK. The seek   
					speed is controlled by the routine DELAY which   
					should loop for approximately 15 milliseconds   
					(for the purposes of the example) prior to re-   
					turning.   
					Page 7—20   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					LDA   
					ASL   
					STA   
					LDA   
					ASL   
					#DSTTRK   
					A 
					TEMP1   
					#SRCTRK   
					A 
					LOOP:   
					CMP   
					BEQ   
					BCS   
					ADC   
					BCC   
					TEMP 1   
					DONE   
					MOVOUT   
					#1   
					MOVE   
					MOVOUT:   
					MOVE:   
					SBC   
					#1   
					PHA   
					AND   
					ASL   
					STA   
					TXA   
					ORA   
					TAY   
					LDA   
					JSR   
					PLA   
					TAY   
					LDA   
					JSR   
					PLA   
					JMP   
					#$03   
					TEMP2   
					TEMP2   
					$C080,Y   
					DELAY   
					$C080,Y   
					DELAY   
					LOOP   
					DONE:   
					<SEEK FINISHED>   
					Page 7—21   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					Motor Off/On   
					LDA $C088,X Turn Motor Off   
					LDA $C089,X Turn Motor On   
					NOTE: A delay should be provided to allow the   
					motor to come up to speed. DOS will keep this   
					delay to a minimum by watching the read latch   
					until data starts to change. Motor—on timing   
					characteristics for the Elite Series drives can   
					be found elsewhere in this manual.   
					Engage Drive within Bank   
					LDA $C08A,X Engage Drive 1:   
					LDA $C08B,X Engage Drive 2:   
					Page 7—22   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					Select Bank   
					TXA   
					LSR   
					Build $Cn00 address   
					to access controller   
					LSR   
					slot dependent PROM.   
					LSR   
					ORA #$CO   
					STA ZPAGE+ 1   
					LDY #$OO   
					STY ZPAGE   
					LDA $CFFF   
					Map out other boards   
					LDA (ZPAGE),Y Map in Elite Controller   
					LDY #BANK   
					STA $C800,Y   
					LDA $CFFF   
					Select Bank 0/1   
					Map out Elite Controller   
					Read a Byte   
					READ LDA $CO8C,X   
					BPL READ   
					NOTE: $CO8E,X must already have been accessed to   
					assure Read mode. The loop is necessary to as—   
					sure that the accumulator will contain valid   
					data. If the data latch does not yet contain   
					valid data, the high bit will be zero.   
					Page 7-23   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					Sense Write Protect   
					LDA $C08D,X   
					LDA $C08E,X   
					Sense write protect   
					BMI ERROR PROTECTED High bit set, protected.   
					Write Load/Write a Byte   
					LDA DATA   
					STA $C08D,X Write Load   
					ORA $C08C,X Write byte   
					NOTE: $C08F,X must already have been accessed to   
					insure Write mode and a 100 microsecond delay   
					should be invoked before writing.   
					Page 7—24   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					Because of hardware constraints, data bytes must   
					be written in 32 processor (6502) cycle loops.   
					The following example illustrates an immediate   
					load of the accumulator followed by a write.   
					Because timing is critical, different routines   
					may be necessary depending upon how the data is   
					to be accessed and code cannot cross memory page   
					boundaries without an adjustment. See the fol-   
					lowing sample write program.   
					LDA #$D5   
					JSR WRITE9 (6)   
					LDA #$AA (3)   
					JSR WRITE9 (6)   
					(3 cycles)   
					WRITE9 CLC   
					WRITE7 PHA   
					PLA   
					(2)   
					(3)   
					(4)   
					WRITE   
					STA $C08D,X (5)   
					ORA $C08C,X (4)   
					RTS   
					(6)   
					NOTE: Software that uses only the commands of   
					the Apple controller will work with the Elite   
					Controller Card.   
					Page 7—25   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					THEORY OF OPERATION   
					This page intentionally left blank.   
					Page 7—26   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					MAINTENANCE   
					8. USER LEVEL MAINTENANCE   
					The Elite Controller card has no moving or elec-   
					trically adjustable parts, so there is no regu-   
					lar maintenance required. On the other hand, the   
					Elite Series drives, like other disk drives, are   
					very mechanical products and should have an   
					annual “check-up”. Since read/write head align-   
					ment and other very precision settings can   
					drift” over an extended period of time (varying   
					with usage), data reliability can also "drift”   
					unless the adjustments are checked.   
					In addition to mechanical adjustment drifts, the   
					read/write head can become dirty from a year‘s   
					worth of diskettes gliding past its surface.   
					The common user remedy for this dirt build-up is   
					to use one of the many head cleaning diskettes   
					available on the market today. However, these   
					diskettes can be very abrasive to the delicate   
					read/write head(s).   
					The safest and most ideal approach to cleaning   
					any drive’s read/write head falls beyond the   
					scope of what Rana Systems supports at the user   
					level. However, Rana Systems has found the   
					Perfect Data Systems Series 2024 5—1/4” head   
					cleaning diskette/kit (part number 101912-21) to   
					be of satisfactory quality for use on the Elite   
					One disk drives. If you find it absolutely   
					necessary to clean the read/write head of an   
					Elite One by yourself, this particular diskette   
					is the only one which should be used.   
					Page 8-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					MAINTENANCE   
					As of yet, no cleaning diskette can be   
					authorized for use on the Elite Two and Three   
					drives. This is due to the difference in the   
					structural design of the second read/write head   
					on these drives from the structure of the   
					primary head shared among all the Elite drives.   
					If you decide to make use of the Perfect Data   
					Systems diskette on an Elite One (or Disk II),   
					make absolutely sure that the second (upper)   
					surface of the cleaning diskette is covered. The   
					Elite One (and Disk ii) have felt pads which are   
					designed to glide on the upper surface of single   
					sided diskettes, and these pads will very   
					quickly wear away if “scrubbed" by a cleaning   
					diskette. Also, make absolutely sure that none   
					of the supplied cleaning solution is on the   
					covering for the upper diskette surface (Elite   
					One and Disk II). Should the covering become   
					damp you will end up contaminating the felt pad   
					in the drive.   
					Regardless of what cleaning diskette is used,   
					there is absolutely no reason for any disk drive   
					‘s read/write head to require cleaning more   
					often than once a year (regardless of what your   
					head cleaning diskette instructions say). One of   
					the worst things you can possibly do to your   
					drive (apart from drop kicking it) is to over   
					clean the read/write heads. The abrasive nature   
					of the head cleaning diskettes place excessive   
					wear on the head surface.   
					Head cleaning on the Elite Two and Three drives,   
					and any other form of maintenance on any Elite   
					drive should be left to your dealer provided the   
					Page 8—2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					MAINTENANCE   
					dealer is authorized as a Rana service center.   
					It’ your dealer is not an authorized Rana   
					service center, then give Rana a call directly   
					for information on the regional service depot   
					nearest you. Correct maintenance insures greater   
					data reliability and a longer drive life span.   
					8.1. Handling   
					The Elite Series drives, unlike the Apple   
					computer, are mechanical devices with motors and   
					moving parts. They are perhaps even more   
					delicate than the computer and must be treated   
					gently.   
					Avoid rough handling such as dropping the drives   
					or letting things drop onto them.   
					Disk drives in general should not be positioned   
					beside or on a television set, since some   
					television sets emit strong magnetic fields   
					which can damage the magnetic properties of disk   
					drives. A general rule is to position a disk   
					drive at least two feet away from any television   
					set.   
					8.2. Diskette Care and Handling   
					To get the best performance from your diskettes   
					and to protect the information you need, the   
					following rules are suggested by the diskette   
					Page 8-3   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					MAINTENANCE   
					manufacturers:   
					1. Whenever handling diskettes do not touch the   
					recording surface. Touch them only on the plas-   
					tic jacket.   
					2. After you have finished using a diskette do   
					replace it in its protective envelope immediate-   
					ly. If you leave a diskette exposed; dust, de-   
					bris, cigarette smoke and other atmospheric   
					pollutants can Quickly cause damage to the   
					recorded data.   
					3. When writing an ID label for the diskette do   
					not use a hard pen, such as a ball point. Use a   
					soft felt tip if the label is already the   
					cover. If you are replacing an ID label, write   
					it out first, then attach it to the diskette   
					jacket. Heavy pressure can mark the surface of a   
					diskette causing malfunction.   
					4. Diskettes work best at temperatures between   
					50 and 120 degrees fahrenheit. Outside these   
					limits, their performance may well deteriorate.   
					Avoid extremes of temperature.   
					5. Avoid all magnets and magnetic fields (like   
					a television set). Always be aware of where you   
					are storing your diskettes, and what equipment   
					is immediately adjacent to their storage area.   
					6. Do not fold or bend diskettes. Handle them   
					carefully so they will always keep their shape   
					and make firm contact with the read/write head.   
					7. Do not use erasers on the ID label. Debris   
					Page 8-4   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					MAINTENANCE   
					can easily attach itself to the diskette surface   
					causing loss of data.   
					8. Always load the diskette gently into the disk   
					drive so it doesn’t bend or center improperly.   
					That causes the diskette to rotate eliptically,   
					missing data.   
					9. Always place the XD label in the rear right   
					or left corner of the jacket. It will act as a   
					guide to handling and inserting the diskette   
					into the drive.   
					10. Do not expose disks to strong sunlight.   
					Diskettes are essentially plastic and can easily   
					warp in extreme temperatures.   
					Many users are concerned about whether or not   
					their diskettes should have reinforced centers   
					(strengthening rings around the inner diskette   
					hole). This reinforcement ring has no effect at   
					all on the disk drive’s performance itself. The   
					primary effect of reinforcement rings is to   
					extend the life time of a diskette.   
					The edges of the center hole on a diskette can   
					become worn with excessive inserting and removal   
					of the diskette. The reinforcement ring comes   
					close to completely eliminating this wear and   
					thus extends the life of the diskette. The   
					choice of whether or not to buy diskettes with   
					these reinforcement rings is completely up to   
					you as a user. Your decision should be based on   
					how often you change diskettes in your drives,   
					Page 8—5   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					MAINTENANCE   
					and how much protection you wish to give to the   
					data on your diskettes.   
					8.3. Back—up Diskettes   
					If you are ever in the position where you have   
					information you cannot afford to lose, make a   
					back-up copy (or even two copies) of the disk-   
					ette and store the copies in a safe place, using   
					the write protect feature described below.   
					8.4. Write Protect   
					All standard end-user blank 5—1/4” diskettes   
					incorporate a write protect feature so your   
					system cannot accidentally write over or destroy   
					valuable information contained on your diskette   
					when the write protect feature is activated.   
					A write protect notch is located on the diskette   
					jacket. When the notch is open, writing to the   
					diskette is allowed.   
					To use the write protect feature, simply cover   
					the notch with an adhesive tab. To write on the   
					diskette, uncover the notch. See the figure   
					below.   
					Note: The write protect feature of the diskette   
					overrides the write protect panel switch feature   
					of the Elite Series drives. If either the   
					diskette itself is write protected or the drive   
					Page 8-6   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					MAINTENANCE   
					is set for write protect, the diskette will be   
					protected.   
					A write protected diskette will always be   
					treated as write protected. A write enabled   
					diskette can be write protected without removing   
					it from an Elite Series drive by pressing the   
					special PROTECT switch on the front panel of the   
					drive.   
					Note: if you are familiar with using eight-inch   
					diskettes and five-inch diskettes are new to   
					you, then the five—inch approach to covering and   
					uncovering the write protect notch will seem a   
					little backwards. However, these instructions   
					are correct. Five—inch drives (in general)   
					detect write protection exactly opposite to the   
					way in which eight—inch drives detect write   
					protection.   
					Page 8-7   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					MAINTENANCE   
					WRITE   
					WRITE   
					PROTECT   
					TAB   
					PROTECT   
					NOTCH   
					UNPROTECTED   
					WRITE PROTECTED   
					Fig. 8-1: Write Protecting Diskettes   
					Page 8—8   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					9. ENHANCED DOS UTILITIES   
					This section deals with the use of each of the   
					enhanced DOS 3.3 utilities individually, in   
					order to provide you with the information you   
					need to use the utilities for more than just   
					enhancing your DOS. If you do not use DOS, then   
					this section will prove to be of little interest   
					to you.   
					The Rana Systems enhancements to Apple’s DOS 3.3   
					consist of five system utilities: FORMAT, CLONE,   
					PROFILE, ENHANCE, and FID ENHANCE. The first is   
					a more versatile replacement for the DOS “INIT”   
					command, which was removed in the enhanced DOS.   
					The second is a more versatile replacement for   
					the DOS COPY and COPYA utilities supplied on   
					original DOS distribution diskettes from Apple.   
					FORMAT is used for initializing new diskettes   
					for use under DOS. It can also be used to   
					reinitialize old diskettes (completely erasing   
					any old data on the diskette). The enhanced   
					version of FORMAT supplies you with the   
					capability of formatting diskettes ranging from   
					143K Disk II diskettes all the way up to a full   
					652K Elite Three diskette.   
					CLONE is used to make exact one—for—one copies   
					of a diskette Onto another diskette. CLONE reads   
					every sector on the original (source) diskette,   
					sector—by—sector, and then writes the informa-   
					tion, sector—by-sector, onto the duplicate   
					(destination) diskette. The enhanced CLONE pro-   
					vides the capability of duplicating all the   
					various different size diskettes used on the   
					Page 9-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					various Elite drives and the Disk II drive. In   
					addition to full diskette copies, CLONE will   
					copy just the (enhanced) DOS system from one   
					diskette to another so that old diskettes can be   
					updated; and new bootable Elite capacity disk-   
					ettes can he created.   
					PROFILE gives you the flexibility to redefine   
					the arrangement of the drives on your system to   
					suit your needs. Since the enhanced DOS needs   
					to know what type of drive you have where,   
					PROFILE is used to tell DOS of any rearranging   
					you wish to do.   
					Both ENHANCE and FID ENHANCE are one-time-only   
					type of utilities. They contains all the var-   
					ious modifications that need to be made to Ap-   
					ple’s standard Apple II DOS 3.3 and associated   
					FID utility in order for the system and utility   
					to use the extra features of the Elite Series   
					products.   
					Page 9—2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					9. 1. FORMAT Utility   
					The enhanced FORMAT utility is designed to re-   
					place the INIT command which is part of the   
					original DOS. The new utility is capable of   
					formatting a diskette just like INIT did, but   
					the new one can also format the higher capacity   
					diskettes used by the Elite Series drives.   
					To get into the FORMAT utility, boot up your   
					enhanced DOS diskette containing FORMAT and   
					type:   
					BRUN FORMAT<RETURN>   
					This will work under both Integer BASIC and   
					Applesoft BASIC.   
					Once DOS has loaded FORMAT, the utility will   
					sign on with:   
					FORMAT   
					RANA SYSTEMS’ 16-SECTOR DOS 3.3   
					5-INCH DISKETTE INITIALIZING UTILITY.   
					COPYRIGHT (C) (P) 1982 RANA SYSTEMS   
					FORMATTER VERSION 2.1   
					INSERT AN ENHANCED DOS 3.3 SYSTEM   
					MASTER DISKETTE INTO SLOT #<s>, DRIVE #<d>.   
					PRESS <RETURN> WHEN READY TO READ DOS   
					IMAGE INTO MEMORY. PRESS <ESC> TO   
					TERMINATE THIS UTILITY.   
					The <s> and <d> part of the above message will   
					be the slot and drive number from which you ran   
					FORMAT.   
					Page 9-3   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					FORMAT assume that it was run from an enhanced   
					DOS master diskette, and therefore assumes it   
					can read a copy of the operating system off the   
					same diskette. If FORMAT was not run from an   
					enhanced system master, you will need to insert   
					a system master into the indicated drive before   
					pressing <RETURN>.   
					FORMAT must read a copy of the DOS system into   
					memory at this point so that it can place it   
					Onto any diskettes you will be formatting; just   
					like the INIT command used to do.   
					You have the option of pressing <ESC> in   
					response to this prompt, which will cause FORMAT   
					to terminate. Of course, this would only make   
					sense if you didn’t really want to run FORMAT in   
					the first place.   
					After you have pressed <RETURN>, and FORMAT has   
					read into memory a copy of the DOS, FORMAT will   
					ask:   
					SLOT NUMBER (1—7)? <s>   
					FORMAT is asking for the slot number of the   
					drive which you wish to use for formatting. The   
					<s> will be the same slot from which you ran   
					FORMAT. If <s> is correct, just hit <RETURN>;   
					otherwise press the slot number which you desire   
					without pressing <RETURN> following it.   
					FORMAT provides you with several ways in which   
					to correct typing errors or incorrect answers.   
					If you need to “back up” to a previous question   
					Page 9-4   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					which you either answered wrong or for which you   
					have changed your mind, simply press <ESC> for   
					each question you need to “back up” past. You   
					don‘t need to type <ESC> once you reach the   
					input you wish to change, simply type the new   
					response.   
					Most of FORMAT’s questions have single key   
					responses, and once you answer the question   
					FORMAT moves on to the next question without   
					your having to press <RETURN>. However, some of   
					FORMAT ‘s questions require more than just a   
					single character response. In such a case the   
					return key must always be pressed after your   
					answer to let FORMAT know you have finished   
					typing.   
					On the multi-character response, if you type   
					<ESC> anytime during your response FORMAT will   
					“back up” to the previous question. If you type   
					<CTRL-X>, FORMAT will erase anything you’ve   
					typed in response to that particular question   
					and redisplay the default answer. You can then   
					just hit <RETURN> to enter the default answer,   
					or type a new answer. The backspace key (left   
					pointer arrow key) can also be used to back up   
					letter by letter to correct typing errors.   
					After you’ve entered the slot number, FORMAT   
					will ask:   
					DRIVE NUMBER (1-4)? <d>   
					This time FORMAT is asking for the number of the   
					drive which you wish to use for formatting. The   
					<d> will not be the same as the drive from which   
					Page 9-5   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					you ran FORMAT. Instead it will be the “others   
					drive depending upon the drive from which FORMAT   
					was ran.   
					For instance, if FORMAT was run from drive 1,   
					<d> would be 2. If FORMAT was run from drive 2,   
					<d> would be 1. If FORMAT was run from drive 3   
					(Elite Controller), <d> would be 4. And last   
					but not least, if FORMAT was run from drive 4,   
					<d> would be 3.   
					The reason which FORMAT shuffles the drive num-   
					ber is because it assumes your system diskette   
					is the one from which FORMAT was run, and there-   
					fore the obvious default would be the “other   
					drive.   
					If the drive number displayed is correct, simply   
					type (RETURN>. If you wish to use a different   
					drive, simply type the drive number without any   
					(RETURN> following it.   
					After you’ve entered a drive number, FORMAT will   
					ask:   
					TYPE OF FORMAT TO PERFORM (0-3)? <t>   
					0)APPLE DISK-II   
					( 35 TRACKS)   
					1)RANA ELITE ONE ( 40 TRACKS)   
					2)RANA ELITE TWO ( 80 TRACKS)   
					3)RANA ELITE THREE (160 TRACKS)   
					The <t> is the type for which the drive is   
					defined under the currently in use DOS.   
					FORMAT is requesting the type of format which   
					you wish it to perform. The format type can be   
					Page 9-6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					completely independent of how the drive is de-   
					fined (see PROFILE) under the enhanced DOS,   
					however it is not completely independent of the   
					actual drive being used to do the formatting.   
					The following table lists which drives can per-   
					form which format types:   
					Format Type   
					Drive Type Possible?   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Disk II   
					Elite Three Special   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three Special   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three Special   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					No   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					No   
					No   
					Yes   
					No   
					No   
					No   
					Elite Three Yes   
					The above table shows that, with the exception   
					of the Elite Three, the higher capacity drives   
					can all format lower capacity diskettes.   
					However, lower capacity drives cannot format   
					higher capacity diskettes.   
					Page 9-7   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					The Elite Three is capable of performing any of   
					the format types, but the resulting diskette is   
					not interchangeable with a non-Elite Three   
					drive. For instance, an Elite Two diskette   
					formatted using an Elite Three cannot be used by   
					an Elite Two drive. In addition, the “special”   
					diskette cannot even be used by an Elite Three   
					drive unless the drive is redefined using   
					PROFILE to be of the same type as the formatted   
					diskette.   
					Once a diskette has been formatted in a parti-   
					cular way, it can be used in any drive which   
					also has “yes” in the above table for the parti-   
					cular type diskette. Once again, this means   
					that, with the exception of the Elite Three,   
					lower capacity diskettes can be used in higher   
					capacity drives.   
					Although this is true regardless of the way the   
					drive is defined under the currently in use DOS   
					(excluding the Elite Three) it is bad practice   
					to use one type of diskette in a drive which has   
					been defined differently. Programs may or may   
					not rely upon the drive definitions within the   
					DOS to determine the way in which the drive, and   
					in turn the diskette, should he treated.   
					If the format type is to he the same as the one   
					displayed by FORMAT (the same as the way the   
					drive is defined), just press RETURN>. If you   
					wish a different format type (taking into   
					account the above table), press the format type   
					nunber listed in the menu without following it   
					with a <RETURN>.   
					Page 9-8   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					After you’ve specified the format type, you will   
					be asked:   
					VOLUME NUMBER (1-254)? 254   
					On this question, the default is always 254,   
					which is the standard default used by the   
					original INIT command. If you wish a different   
					volume number, just type it in followed by   
					<RETURN>. If the default number is okay, just   
					type <RETURN> without anything else.   
					After you specify the volume number, FORMAT will   
					want to know the hello file name. However, it   
					asks it in a slightly funny way:   
					HI FILE? HELLO   
					Asking for the “hi” file is not FORMAT’s way of   
					being cute, instead in permits a full 30   
					character file name (permitted under DOS) to be   
					specified on the 40 column Apple screen.   
					Although the INIT command required a hello file   
					name (it would not default), the default has   
					always been accepted as being “HELLO”. The   
					hello file is the program which DOS   
					automatically executes when that diskette is   
					booted.   
					You have the option of typing a new file name   
					(if you don’t like HELLO) followed by <RETURN>,   
					or simply pressing <RETURN> without typing   
					anything else to accept the default name.   
					Page 9—9   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					Unlike the INIT command, FORMAT will not save   
					the hello file onto the diskette once the   
					diskette is formatted. This is because FORMAT is   
					also a program, and only one program can fit   
					into memory at one time. This means that the   
					only program FORMAT would have around to save as   
					the hello file is FORMAT itself, and its unlike-   
					ly that is the hello program you will want.   
					Once FORMAT is finished, you can go back and   
					save the hello program Onto the diskettes you   
					formatted. The enhanced FID utility can be used   
					to copy binary and text files. Refer to your DOS   
					manual and also the FID ENHANCE utility later in   
					this section.   
					Once you’ve specified the HELLO file name,   
					FORMAT allows you specify a little something   
					extra which INIT does not permit:   
					INVOKE HELLO FILE HOW (A-C)? A   
					A) RUN <HI FILE>   
					B) BRUN <HI FILE>   
					C) EXEC <HI FILE>   
					The default (RUN <HI FILE>) is the only choice   
					you get with INIT and is therefore the default.   
					If you specify the RUN option, then your hello   
					file must be an Integer BASIC or Applesoft   
					program. If you specify the BRUN option, then   
					your hello file must be a binary (machine   
					language) program. And, if you specify the EXEC   
					option, your file must be a text file containing   
					DOS commands. For more explanation, refer to   
					your DOS manual under each of these commands.   
					Page 9—10   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					You can either type one of the menu item letters   
					without following it with <RETURN> if you don’t   
					want the default (A), or you can simply press   
					(RETURN> to accept the default. If this   
					selection confuses you, simply press <RETURN>   
					and FORMAT will default to exactly what the INIT   
					command did.   
					Since that is the last piece of information   
					FORMAT needs to know, it will display:   
					INSERT DISKETTE IN DRIVE. PRESS   
					<RETURN> TO INITIALIZE, PRESS <ESC>   
					TO CHANGE PARAMETERS.   
					This means that FORMAT is ready to proceed with   
					the formatting and is giving you one last chance   
					to “bail out”. If you press <RETURN>, FORMAT   
					will proceed with the diskette format. If you   
					press <ESC>, FORMAT will return to the “invoke   
					how?” prompt.   
					Once FORMAT is allowed to proceed with the   
					formatting, it will first check to see if the   
					diskette is already formatted for 76—sectors   
					(this includes CP/M and Pascal diskettes).   
					Whether or not FORMAT is successful in detecting   
					an already formatted diskette is highly   
					dependent upon how the drive being used is   
					defined in the current in use DOS, and also how   
					the already formatted diskette was formatted   
					originally. Therefore, this test should not be   
					relied upon.   
					If FORMAT does find an already formatted   
					diskette, it will ask:   
					Page 9-11   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					DISKETTE CONTAINS DATA.   
					INITIALIZE ANYWAYS (Y/N)?   
					If it is okay to format the diskette, simply   
					type <Y> without any <RETURN>. If you didn’t   
					expect the diskette to be already formatted,   
					type <N> and FORMAT will not format the   
					diskette.   
					Once FORMAT has finished with the formatting,   
					or if you specify <N> to the “initialize   
					anyways?” question, FORMAT will ask:   
					DO ANOTHER DISKETTE (Y/N)?   
					Once again you can respone <Y> or <N>. If you   
					specify <N>, FORMAT will return you to BASIC. If   
					you specify <Y>, FORMAT will return to the point   
					where you can specify <RETURN> to start   
					formatting another diskette, or <ESC> to change   
					parameters. If you wish to format another   
					diskette the same way in the same drive, the you   
					can change diskettes and just type <RETURN>.   
					If you wish to change some of your previous   
					responses, use <ESC> to back up to the entry you   
					wish to change.   
					Page 9-12   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					9.2. CLONE Utility   
					The CLONE utility is very similar to the COPY   
					and COPYA utility supplied by Apple on their   
					Apple DOS 3.3 Master Diskette. In fact, CLONE   
					is the enhanced DOS ‘s replacement for the two   
					Apple utilities.   
					To get into the CLONE utility, boot up your   
					enhanced DOS diskette containing CLONE and type:   
					BRUN CLONE<RETURN>   
					This will work under both Integer BASIC and   
					Applesoft BASIC.   
					Once CLONE has been loaded into memory by DOS,   
					the utility will sign—on by saying:   
					CLONE   
					RANA SYSTEMS’ 16-SECTOR DOS 3.3   
					5-INCH DISKETTE COPY UTILITY.   
					COPYRIGHT (C) (p) 1982 RANA SYSTEMS   
					CLONE VERSION 2. 1   
					CLONE TYPE TO PERFORM: 0   
					0) WHOLE DISKETTE   
					1) DOS ONLY   
					Unlike COPY and COPYA, CLONE allows you to copy   
					on the DOS image (boot tracks) from one diskette   
					to another without disturbing the other   
					information off the destination diskette. This   
					allows you to update existing DOS diskettes with   
					the enhanced DOS.   
					Page 9—13   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					Since CLONE will also copy an entire diskette   
					(just like COPY and COPYA), the first question   
					it will as is which type of copy you wish CLONE   
					to perform (as shown above). The default is   
					“whole diskette” copy, which means you can   
					simply press (RETURN> to specify that copy type.   
					Pressing <0> will also tell CLONE to copy the   
					entire diskette. Pressing <1> will indicate to   
					CLONE that you wish only the DOS to be copied.   
					No matter which type of copy you specify, CLONE   
					will then ask:   
					SOURCE:   
					SLOT NUMBER (1-7)? <ss>   
					where <ss> is the slot number from which you ran   
					CLONE.   
					A special feature of CLONE is that it allows you   
					to back—up to previously answered questions so   
					that you can change you answer. To do this,   
					simply type <ESC> in response to any question an   
					you will be returned to the previous question.   
					You can then press <RSC> again to back-up   
					another question.   
					With the above question, CLONE is asking for the   
					slot number of the drive in which you will be   
					inserting the source (original) diskette. If   
					<ss> is correct, you can simply press <RETURN>.   
					If <ss> is wrong, press the number of the slot   
					which is correct.   
					Once the slot number is specified, CLONE will   
					ask:   
					Page 9-14   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					DRIVE NUMBER (1-4)? <Sd>   
					where <Sd> is the drive number from which you ran   
					CLONE.   
					The also refers to the drive in which you will   
					he inserting the source diskette. You can   
					simply press <RETURN> if <sd> is correct. If   
					you wish to specify a different drive number,   
					press the new number.   
					After the source drive number, CLONE asks:   
					DISKETTE TYPE (0-3)? <st>   
					where <st> is the drive type which you have   
					specified (using PROFILE) for the source drive   
					you selected, as follows:   
					0 = Disk II   
					1 = Elite One   
					2 = Elite Two   
					3 = Elite Three   
					Although CLONE determines the default answer to   
					this question by looking to see how you have the   
					source drive defined under the currently booted   
					DOS, this question is referring to the source   
					diskette itself and not the drive.   
					CLONE places restrictions on both the source   
					diskette and the destination diskette according   
					to how the drive is defined under the booted   
					DOS. CLONE will not permit you to specify a   
					diskette type which has a larger capacity than   
					Page 9-15   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					the capacity for which the drive is defined.   
					Given that restriction, CLONE will treat either   
					diskette the way you specify in response to this   
					question (for the source) and a later question   
					(for the destination). But you are still re-   
					stricted by what the drives being used are phys-   
					ically capable of doing.   
					The following tables relates whether or not each   
					diskette type can be copied from/to each of the   
					various drive types:   
					DISKETTE   
					DRIVE   
					SOURCE?   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Disk II   
					Elite Three Special   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three Special   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three Special   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					No   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					No   
					No   
					Yes   
					No   
					No   
					No   
					Elite Three Yes   
					Several special circumstances arise when the   
					Page 9—16   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					Elite Three is used in the copy process when not   
					performing a straight Elite Three to Elite Three   
					copy.   
					It is possible to use the Elite Three as the   
					source drive for all types of diskette copies.   
					This goes right along with the standard Elite   
					Three usage rule that it can read any of the   
					lesser storage capacity diskettes.   
					When the Elite Three is used as the destination   
					drive, a very special point needs to be remem-   
					bered. The resultant destination (duplicate)   
					diskette will not be compatible with its as-   
					sociated drive type, unless the diskette and   
					drive type is Elite Three. Once again, this   
					comes from the fact that the Elite Three is not   
					write compatible with non-Elite Three drives.   
					This is not to say that the Elite Three can’t be   
					used as the destination drive in a non-Elite   
					Three copy. This simply means that the   
					resultant diskette will only be readable by an   
					Elite Three drive.   
					After all the source drive and diskette   
					questions have been answered, CLONE will move on   
					to the destination (duplicate) drive and   
					diskette information:   
					DESTINATION:   
					SLOT NUMBER (1-7)? <ds>   
					<ds> is the default answer you will BE   
					specifying if you just press <RETURN>. If <ds>   
					is not the slot number you want for the   
					Page 9-17   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					destination drive, simply press the correct   
					number.   
					CLONE will allow you to specify the same drive   
					as both the source and destination drive. In   
					this case, CLONE will give you a change to   
					change diskettes during the copying process.   
					After the destination slot number question   
					comes:   
					DRIVE NUMBER (1—4)? <dd>   
					where (dd> is the default destination drive   
					number. Once again, <dd> will be used if you   
					just press <RETURN>. If <dd> is not correct,   
					press the correct number.   
					The last question is:   
					DISKETTE TYPE (0-3)? <dt>   
					where <dt> is the drive type you have defined in   
					the booted WS for the destination drive you   
					specified. This drive type number is just like   
					the table of numbers listed previously for the   
					source diskette type.   
					Just like with the source diskette type, CLONE   
					is asking what type of diskette the destination   
					diskette is to be and not what type of drive is   
					going to be used.   
					CLONE will not permit you to specify a destina-   
					tion diskette type which has a smaller capacity   
					Page 9—18   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					than the source diskette type. Also, since CLONE   
					will not restructure the diskette’s directory or   
					associated information when copying from a   
					lesser capacity diskette to a higher capacity   
					diskette, there is only one real reason to   
					specify a diskette type different from that   
					specified for the source diskette: copying non-   
					Elite Three diskette files to Elite Three disk-   
					ette files when you have only one drive and its   
					an Elite Three. The FIDR utility can be used to   
					copy files between different capacity diskettes.   
					See FID ENHANCE in this manual, and the instruc-   
					tions for FID in Apple’s The DOS Manual.   
					FIDR will permit you to transfer individual   
					files between two diskettes using only a single   
					drive, however FIDR assumes that both the source   
					and destination diskette will be of the same   
					type as defined using PROFILE in the booted DOS.   
					Due to the way DOS works (which is outside the   
					scope of this manual), this does not present a   
					problem when transferring between two non-Elite   
					Three diskettes of different types; even though   
					the single drive is defined for a particular   
					diskette type.   
					However, this capability does not extend to   
					Elite Three drives. Therefore, on single drive   
					Elite Three systems, there is a special approach   
					to transferring non—Elite Three diskette files   
					to Elite Three diskettes.   
					The first step is to use CLONE’s whole diskette   
					copy to copy the non-Elite Three diskette   
					(source) to an Elite Three type diskette   
					(destination type of 3). This will convert the   
					Page 9—19   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					diskette data into a structure which is   
					compatible with the Elite Three, hut which will   
					not have the full storage capacity of the Elite   
					Three. Then FIDR can be used to copy the   
					individual files from the restructured diskette   
					onto a full capacity Elite Three diskette.   
					Back to CLONE itself. Once the destination   
					drive and diskette questions have been answered,   
					CLONE will say:   
					PLEASE INSERT BOTH DISKETTES AND   
					PRESS <RETURN>   
					if you specified different source and dest-   
					ination drives, or:   
					PLEASE INSERT THE SOURCE DISKETTE   
					AND PRESS <RETURN> TO CONTINUE.   
					if you specified the same drive for both source   
					and destination.   
					This is your indication that CLONE is ready to   
					being the copying process. You should insert   
					either just the source diskette (single drive   
					copy) or both diskettes (two drive copy), and   
					then press <RETURN> to being the copy process.   
					If you specified that only the DOS is to be   
					copied, then CLONE will give you a reminder to:   
					INSERT AN ENHANCED DOS 3.3 SYSTEM   
					MASTER DISKETTE INTO SLOT #<s>, DRIVE #<d>.   
					PRESS <RETURN> WHEN READY TO READ DOS   
					IMAGE INTO MEMORY. PRESS <ESC> TO   
					Page 9-20   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					TERMINATE THIS UTILITY.   
					After you allow CLONE to proceed (whole diskette   
					or DOS only), it will read as much information   
					from the source diskette as it can fit into   
					memory, and then write the information to the   
					destination diskette. If you specified a single   
					drive copy, then CLONE will first request:   
					PLEASE INSERT THE DESTINATION DISKETTE   
					AND PRESS <RETURN> TO CONTINUE.   
					This means that CLONE is waiting for you to   
					remove the source diskette and insert the   
					destination diskette. Once you’ve changed the   
					diskette, press (RETURN> and CLONE will continue   
					with the copy.   
					When CLONE has written out all the information   
					it has in memory, it will change back to reading   
					the source diskette to get more. If you’re   
					doing a single drive copy then CLONE will   
					request that you insert the source diskette just   
					like it did at the start of the copy process.   
					Two drive copies proceed all the way through   
					without your having to play with either   
					diskette.   
					Once CLONE has finished with the copy, it will   
					say:   
					DO ANOTHER COPY (Y/N)?   
					If you press <N>, CLONE will dump you back into   
					BASIC. If you press <Y>, CLONE will return to   
					Page 9-21   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					the “insert source/both diskettes” prompt.   
					You can change the copy type (whole or DOS   
					only), the drives, and/or the diskette types,   
					before making another copy by pressing <ESC> for   
					the “insert diskettes” prompt.   
					Special note concerning DOS-only copies:   
					During a DOS only copy (and not during a whole   
					diskette copy) the DOS copy which. is placed on   
					the destination diskette will be restructured   
					(if necessary) to conform to the way the DOS   
					should   
					boot   
					off   
					of   
					the   
					destination   
					drive/diskette type you specified.   
					The way in which DOS is structured for booting   
					off of an Elite One is identical to the way it   
					is structured for the Disk II, but changes are   
					made when dealing with full capacity diskettes   
					for the Elite Two and Elite Three.   
					There are two conditions which must be met for a   
					copy of the enhanced DOS to boot correctly (at   
					all) from a diskette. The first is that the DOS   
					must be placed on the diskette in a way which is   
					compatible with the booting process for that   
					particular type of diskette/drive (this is done   
					by CLONE). The second is that the configuration   
					table within the DOS must reflect the correct   
					setting for the way the DOS has been placed on   
					the diskette (see PROFILE).   
					In order to assure these two conditions, the   
					Page 9-22   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					configuration table on the source diskette must   
					be set (using PROFILE) correctly for the boot   
					slot and drive prior to copying the DOS to the   
					destination diskette. The other option is to use   
					PROFILE to change the table setting on the   
					destination diskette after the copy has been   
					made, but PROFILE will require that the drive   
					containing the DOS to he changed be defined (in   
					the currently hooted DOS) to match the way the   
					DOS is structured on the diskette.   
					CLONE will allow you (under certain conditions)   
					to copy a DOS image onto a diskette using a   
					structure specified by you which does not neces-   
					sarily match the way in which the diskette was   
					originally formatted. You should never do this.   
					This will either immediately destroy one or more   
					of the files on the destination diskette, or the   
					diskette will stop booting as soon as a new file   
					manages to overwrite the DOS on the diskette.   
					Page 9—23   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					9.3. PROFILE utility   
					The PROFILE utility is the heart of the enhanced   
					DOS system. It is this utility which allows you   
					to tell DOS where various drive models are lo-   
					cated on your system, and also allows you to   
					declare the drive as a different model (an Elite   
					Two as a Disk TI, for example) to allow you to   
					read and create diskettes to be interchanged   
					with other Apple II DOS systems.   
					PROFILE has absolutely no effect on the Elite   
					Controller card since the enhanced DOS functions   
					with it completely automatically. Enhanced DOS   
					does not need to be told to use all four drives   
					on the Elite Controller, and to only use two   
					drives on the Disk II controller; it’s all auto-   
					matic.   
					To get PROFILE running, type:   
					BRUN PROFILE   
					and the utility will respond with:   
					PROFILE V2. 1 COPYR. (c)(P) 1982 RANA SYS.   
					FROM WHICH SLOT AND DRIVE   
					IS DOS IMAGE TO BE WADED?   
					ENTER SLOT NUMBER (7-7)   
					Since PROFILE will only make definition changes   
					to on-disk copies of the enhanced DOS (the in   
					use in-memory copy of DOS cannot be modified),   
					the first thing PROFILE needs to know is where   
					Page 9-24   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					the DOS to be modified led is located.   
					If you type <ESC>, PROFILE will return you to   
					BASIC.   
					PROFILE is very dependent upon how you have your   
					drives defined under the currently in use DOS.   
					Whenever you specify to PROFILE that It is to   
					read a copy of DOS off of a particular diskette,   
					PROFILE assumes that the DOS will be arranged on   
					the diskette according to the way the drive is   
					defined.   
					This means that an Elite One system diskette   
					cannot be read by a drive defined under the   
					currently in use DOS as an Elite Two.   
					Keeping this in mind, you would answer PROFILE   
					by typing the number of the slot from which   
					PROFILE is to read a copy of the enhanced DOS   
					without following the number with a <RETURN>.   
					After you’ve told PROFILE the slot number, it   
					will ask:   
					ENTER DRIVE NUMBER (1-4)   
					Just like with the slot number, you would type   
					the number of the drive from which PROFILE is to   
					read the copy DOS. If you type <ESC>, PROFILE   
					will return to the slot number question.   
					Page 9—25   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					After you have entered the two numbers, PROFILE   
					will prompt you with:   
					INSERT AN ENHANCED DOS 3.3 SYSTEM   
					MASTER DISKETTE INTO SLOT #<s>, DRIVE #<d>.   
					PRESS <RETURN> WREN READY TO READ DOS   
					IMAGE INTO MEMORY. PRESS <ESC> IF LOAD   
					NO LONGER DESIRED.   
					<s> and <d> are the slot and drive numbers you   
					specified.   
					If you‘ve changed your mind and no longer wish   
					to change any drive definitions, you can type   
					<ESC> and PROFILE will return you to BASIC.   
					Otherwise, insert an enhanced DOS master   
					diskette which is compatible with the way the   
					drive is defined; and then press <RETURN>.   
					PROFILE will read in the copy of the DOS, and   
					then display half a screen full of drive   
					settings.   
					These settings will be arranged by slot number   
					in the up and down direction, and by drive   
					number in the across direction. Each setting   
					displayed is made of two separate parts. The   
					first part consists of five characters as fol-   
					lows:   
					DISK2 = Apple Disk II   
					ELIT1 = RANA Elite One   
					ELIT2 = RANA Elite Two   
					ELIT3 = RANA Elite Three   
					The second part is a single character   
					Page 9-26   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					immediately after the first five characters as   
					follows:   
					S = Slow (Disk II standard)   
					M = Medium (Elite One standard)   
					F = Fast (Elite Two and Three standard)   
					This displayed table shows how each drive   
					position which is possible on the Apple II is   
					currently defined. Including drive positions   
					for which there are no controllers or drives at   
					the present time.   
					Following the table, PROFILE will display a menu   
					of choices:   
					ENTER SELECTION (0-3)   
					1)LOAD NEW DOS IMAGE FROM DISK   
					2)CHANGE CURRENT DOS IMAGE SETTING   
					3)SAVE CURRENT DOS IMAGE 2V DISK   
					0)TERMINATE PROFILE   
					You can choose an item by pressing its menu   
					number without pressing <RETURN>.   
					The first item allows you to read into memory a   
					different copy of DOS to b~ altered. (Note:   
					reading a DOS copy into memory does not mean   
					replacing the currently operating DOS copy.)   
					The second item allows you to make changes to   
					the copy of DOS you already have in memory. The   
					third item allows you to save the DOS copy you   
					have in memory (changes and all) back out to a   
					diskette. And the last item gets you out of   
					PROFILE back to BASIC.   
					Page 9-27   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					If you select any of the first three items,   
					PROFILE will ask you the slot and drive number   
					questions which it asked you when you first ran   
					PROFILE. However, the drive PROFILE is asking   
					for varies with the menu item you selected.   
					For item 1 (load new DOS image), PROFILE will be   
					asking for the drive from which you wish to load   
					the new copy of DOS.   
					For item 2 (change current DOS image setting),   
					PROFILE will be asking fox- the drive who’s   
					definition (setting) you wish to change in the   
					copy of DOS you already have read into memory.   
					For item 3 (save DOS image), PROFiLE will be   
					asking for the drive to which you wish to save   
					the DOS image (and any changes) you have in   
					memory. This need not be the same drive or   
					diskette from which you loaded the DOS image,   
					but the image will he placed onto the diskette   
					in a format which is compatible with the way the   
					drive is defined under the in use DOS.   
					Item 1 will cause PROFILE to proceed exactly   
					like it did when you first ran PROFILE, except   
					that pressing <ESC> for the final <ESC>/<RETURN>   
					prompt will return you to the selection menu   
					instead of dumping you back into BASIC.   
					Page 9—28   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					After specifying the drive to be redefined under   
					item 2, PROFILE will ask:   
					ENTER DRIVE TYPE (0-3)   
					0)APPLE DISK-II   
					( 35 TRACKS)   
					1)RANA ELITE ONE ( 40 TRACKS)   
					2)RANA ELITE TWO ( 80 TRACKS)   
					3)RANA ELITE THREE (160 TRACKS)   
					<t> will be the current setting for the drive as   
					reflected in the table at the top of the screen.   
					If you simply press <RETURN>, the definition   
					will be left unchanged. If you wish to change   
					the definition for the drive, simply type the   
					new definition menu item number without any   
					<RETURN>.   
					<ESC> can also be typed to return to the drive   
					number question.   
					After you have answered the drive type question,   
					PROFILE will ask:   
					ENTER SEEK SPEED (0-2) : <s>   
					0)SLOW (DISK-II AND ELITE SERIES)   
					1)MEDIUM (ELITE SERIES ONLY)   
					2)FAST (ELITE TWO AND THREE)   
					<s> will be the correct seek speed for the drive   
					type you selected (or defaulted to). If you   
					just type <RETURN>, <s> will be used.   
					Otherwise, you can type one of the menu item   
					numbers without press <RETURN>.   
					After you make your selection, PROFILE will   
					display the change you made at the top of the   
					Page 9-29   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					screen, and then return to the main menu. The   
					change which was made still needs to he saved to   
					a diskette, otherwise the redefined system   
					cannot be booted.   
					Main menu item 3 (save DOS image) is used to   
					save the redefined DOS. After PROFILE requests   
					the slot and drive numbers for item 3, it will   
					say:   
					INSERT FORMATTED DISKETTE TO RECIEVE   
					ENHANCED DOS 3.3 SYSTEM MASTER IMAGE   
					INTO SLOT #<s>, DRIVE #<d>. PRESS <RETURN>   
					WREN READY TO WRITE DOS IMAGE FROM   
					MEMORY. PRESS <ESC> IF SAVE NO LONGER   
					DESIRED.   
					<s> and <d> are the slot and drive numbers you   
					specified.   
					At this paint you can type <ESC> and PROFILE   
					will return to the main menu. Otherwise, insert   
					the diskette to receive to redefined DOS and   
					press <RETURN>. The diskette must he formatted   
					correctly for the way the drive is defined under   
					the in use DOS. PROFILE will write the DOS to   
					the diskette in that format.   
					Once PROFILE has finished writing the copy of   
					DOS to the diskette, it will return to the main   
					menu.   
					The last menu item (0) is self explanatory, and   
					probably only requires a little practice.   
					Page 9-30   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					9.4. ENHANCE Utility   
					The ENHANCE utility is intended as a one—time-   
					only utility. Once you’ve performed the DOS   
					enhancements outlined earlier in this manual,   
					ENHANCE is no longer needed. The FORMAT and   
					CLONE utilities are used to make new enhanced   
					DOS system master diskettes. It is not necessary   
					the use ENHANCE to keep enhancing every new   
					DOS system diskette you create. The earlier DOS   
					enhancing instructions are essentially the in-   
					structions for using ENHANCE.   
					Page 9-31   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					9.5. FID ENHANCE Utility   
					The FID ENHANCE utility does for Apple’s FID   
					utility what ENHANCE did for Apple’s DOS. It   
					makes it more intelligent. FID, as it exists in   
					its original form from Apple (supplied by Apple   
					on the DOS master diskette) does not exactly   
					follow all of the conventions which Apple has   
					defined for reading and writing to diskettes.   
					If it did, it would work with every Elite Series   
					drive except the Elite Three (special case).   
					FID, as it comes from Apple, will work correctly   
					on the Elite One drive without any modification.   
					In fact, FID will even function correctly with   
					the Elite Two drive except it will refuse to   
					copy files to all of the Elite two diskette.   
					Unmodified FID should never be used on a Elite   
					Three since it has a tendency to “butcher” di-   
					rectory entries. In addition, FID only allows   
					you to specify a drive number of 1 or 2 because   
					that’s all Apple gave you on their Disk II   
					controller card.   
					But never fear! Rana has come to the rescue.   
					FID can be saved from its own stupidity!   
					FID ENHANCE is a very straight forward, down to   
					business utility which will teach FID all those   
					little things it should have known to begin   
					with. The catch is that FID ENHANCE must be on   
					the same diskettes as FID, which means using the   
					“dumb” FID to put it on the diskette.   
					Page 9—32   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					Since “dumb’ FID will work with Disk II and   
					Elite One diskettes correctly, you need to   
					create a Disk II or Elite One diskette   
					containing FID on it. The run FID and specify   
					menu item 1 (copy files) in order to copy FID   
					ENHANCE onto the same diskette as "dumb" FID.   
					For more information on using FID, refer to your   
					DOS manual.   
					Once FID and FID ENHANCE are on the same   
					diskette, simply type:   
					BRUN FID ENHANCE   
					to begin the modifications.   
					FID ENHANCE does not ask you anything. The   
					first things it does is issue a “BLOAD FID”   
					command to DOS in order to load FID into memory   
					(FID must be on the diskette, or DOS will inform   
					you of the error).   
					Once DOS has loaded FID into memory, FID ENHANCE   
					will perform the necessary “teaching” and then   
					issue a BSAVE FIDR" to DOS to save the new   
					“smart” FID under the name of FIDR. The “R” on   
					the end indicates it is the Rana modified copy   
					of FID.   
					FIDR can then be used exactly like the original   
					FID, except FIDR is completely compatible with   
					the entire Elite Series drive line and also the   
					four drives of the Elite Controller.   
					Page 9—33   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED DOS UTIL.   
					This page intentionally left blank.   
					Page 9—34   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					10. ENHANCED CP/M UTILITIES   
					This section deals with the use of each of the   
					new CP/M utilities individually, in order to   
					provide you with the information you need in   
					order to use the utilities for more than just   
					enhancing your CP/M. If you do not use CP/M,   
					then this section will prove to be of little   
					interest to you.   
					The Rana Systems enhancements to Microsoft Apple   
					II 16—Sector 56K CP/M 2.2 consist of five system   
					utilities: FORMAT, COPY, PROFILE, SGLDRIVE, and   
					ENHANCE. The first two are replacements for   
					utility programs provided by Microsoft on their   
					original CP/M distribution diskette.   
					FORMAT is used for initializing new diskettes   
					for use under CP/M. It can also be used to   
					reformat old diskettes (completely erasing any   
					old data on the diskette). The enhanced version   
					of FORMAT supplies you with the capability of   
					formatting diskettes ranging from 143K Disk II   
					diskettes all the way up to a full 652K Elite   
					Three diskette.   
					COPY is used to make exact one—for-one copies of   
					a diskette onto another diskette. Unlike the   
					standard CP/M utility PIP, COPY does not copy   
					the diskette file-by—file. Instead, COPY reads   
					every sector on the original (source) diskette,   
					sector—by—sector, and then writes the informa-   
					tion, sector—by—sector, onto the duplicate (tar-   
					get) diskette. The enhanced COPY provides the   
					capability of duplicating all the various dif-   
					ferent size diskettes used on the various Elite   
					Page 10-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					drives and the Disk II drive.   
					PROFILE gives you the flexibility to redefine   
					the arrangement of the drives on your system to   
					suit your needs. Since CP/M needs to know what   
					type of drive you have where, PROFILE is used to   
					tell CP/M of any rearranging (temporary or per-   
					manent) you wish to do.   
					SGLDRIVE is a special utility primarily intended   
					to help those users who have only a single disk   
					drive. Several of the CP/M utilities (PIP in   
					particular) were not written for use on single   
					drive systems. SGLDRIVE can be used to “fool   
					these utilities (and CP/M itself) into thinking   
					that a single drive is actually two drives.   
					ENHANCE is a one-time-only type of utility. It   
					contains all the various modifications that need   
					to be made to the standard Apple II CP/M distri-   
					buted by Microsoft in order for the system to   
					use the extra features of the Elite Series pro-   
					ducts.   
					Page 10—2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					10.1. Notation   
					Since almost all of the various different com-   
					mands which you can give to the enhanced CP/M   
					utilities contain choices and options, it is   
					necessary to define a syntax notation. This   
					notation permits the extensive amount of mater-   
					ial covered by this section to be reduced to as   
					small an amount of verbiage as possible.   
					[ ] Square brackets surround those items   
					which are optional. The items can be   
					used as part of the command sentence,   
					or completely left out.   
					< > Angle brackets are used to surround   
					lower case letters or words which are   
					meant to describe only one item. The   
					letters or words enclosed infer the   
					type of “thing” that is supposed to be   
					plugged in” at that location in the   
					command, and not the exact letters   
					which should be typed. (<filename>)   
					Angle brackets are also used to sur-   
					round upper case letters or words. In   
					this case, the letter or word is an   
					actual key on the keyboard which is to   
					be typed. (<RETURN>)   
					{ } Braces enclose lists of items from   
					which you must choose one (and only   
					one). If the items in the list are also   
					enclosed the square brackets, then it   
					is permissable to select none.   
					Page 10—3   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					! 
					The exclamation point is used to sep-   
					arate the different choices enclosed   
					in braces.   
					... Ellipses are used to indicate that you   
					may repeat the entry as many times as   
					you need or desire.   
					CAPS Capital letters are used for those   
					portions of the command which you must   
					type exactly as show. In addition,   
					other symbols not listed above must be   
					typed as shown. If any of the above   
					symbols must be typed, they will be   
					enclosed in angle brackets. (<!>)   
					Page 10-4   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					10.2. FORMAT Utility   
					The enhanced FORMAT utility is designed to re-   
					place the original FORMAT utility supplied by   
					Microsoft. The new utility is capable of for-   
					matting a diskette just like the old one did,   
					but the new one can also format the higher   
					capacity diskettes used by the Elite Series   
					drives.   
					In order to get FORMAT running, you need to be   
					in CP/M command level. This is indicated by:   
					A>   
					being displayed by CP/M. The “A” would be which   
					ever drive is your current logged (default)   
					drive.   
					FORMAT is executed by typing:   
					<d> :FORMAT<RETURN>   
					with a diskette containing the new FORMAT util-   
					ity inserted into drive <d>.   
					FORMAT will sign-on by saying:   
					APPLE ][ CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Formatter   
					Primary Copyright 1980 Microsoft   
					Portions Copyright 1982 RANA Systems   
					RANA Systems Version 1.1   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					Page 10—5   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					This is all very similar to the way the original   
					(old) FORMAT signed-on. In fact the first part   
					of the answer to FORMAT’s “which drive?” ques-   
					tion is just like the response you would give to   
					the original FORMAT, but there is more which has   
					been added to the command.   
					The complete syntax of the answer is:   
					<d>: <type><RETURN>   
					<d> is the drive letter which will be used to   
					format the diskette. The colon (:) is typed as   
					shown. <type> is a single digit number (0-3)   
					which tells FORMAT which type of formatting to   
					perform, as follows:   
					O = Apple Disk ][   
					1 = RANA Elite One   
					2 = RANA Elite Two   
					3 = RANA Elite Three   
					( 35 tracks)   
					( 40 tracks)   
					( 80 tracks)   
					(160 tracks)   
					FORMAT is capable of performing any one of these   
					format types on the specified drive regardless   
					of how the drive is specified under CP/M (see   
					PROFILE). However, it cannot format a diskette   
					using a particular type of format on a drive   
					which is incapable of handling that type of   
					format.   
					This is really just common sense when you con-   
					sider that if the Disk II could handle 652K   
					bytes of storage just like the Elite Three can,   
					then Apple would be saying the Disk II can do   
					652K bytes instead of 143K.   
					Page 10-6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					The following table shows which drive models can and can   
					not be used to format the various different types of diskettes:   
					Diskette Type   
					Drive Model   
					Can/Can’t   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Can   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Can   
					Can   
					Can’t   
					Can’t   
					Can   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Can   
					Can’t   
					Can’t   
					Can’t   
					Can   
					Can’t   
					Can’t   
					Can’t   
					Can’t   
					Can   
					The basic rule of thumb which this table points   
					out is that smaller capacity drives can not   
					format diskettes for the higher capacity drives,   
					but the higher capacity drives can format disk-   
					ettes for the smaller capacity drives. The   
					exception which makes this rule true is the   
					Elite Three.   
					Page 10—7   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					Since the Elite Three achieves its 652K of stor-   
					age by writing half width tracks in half track   
					increments, the tracks (and any other data at   
					other times) which the Elite Three writes while   
					formatting a diskette are too small for the   
					lower capacity drives to read.   
					Once you press <RETURN> following your command,   
					FORMAT will say:   
					Insert disk to be formatted in drive <d>:   
					Press RETURN to begin   
					The <d> here is the drive letter you specified   
					in your command. Before proceeding, you will   
					need to make sure that the diskette you wish to   
					format is the one which is in the specified   
					drive.   
					If you are formatting a diskette on which you   
					already have programs or data, remember that   
					when FORMAT finishes with the diskette all those   
					data or program files will be completely gone.   
					(No hope of recovering them.)   
					Another “peace of mind” thing to do is to open   
					the doors on any other drives you have which are   
					not being used for the format. This makes sure   
					nothing unexpected happens to any other disk-   
					ettes you may have in those other drives.   
					Once you hit <RETURN> to allow FORMAT to begin,   
					the first thing it will do is try to read the   
					diskette to be formatted to see if it already   
					has any information on it. This little check is   
					very dependent upon how you have the drive de-   
					Page 10-8   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					fined under CP/M and what type of already for-   
					matted diskette you have in the drive.   
					Normally FORMAT will detect an already formatted   
					16-sector diskette (including DOS 3.3 and Apple   
					Pascal diskettes), but given certain circum-   
					stances it may not. Therefore, you should not   
					rely upon this check. If FORMAT does find the   
					diskette to be already formatted, it will say:   
					Disk in drive d>: will be ERASED.   
					Continue (Y/N)?   
					If you reply <Y><RETURN>, FORMAT will go ahead   
					and format the diskette (erasing everything that   
					was on the diskette, for ever and ever). If you   
					reply <N><RETURN>, FORMAT will return to the   
					“which disk?” question without formatting the   
					diskette.   
					Once you let FORMAT go ahead and do its job, it   
					will say:   
					Formatting...   
					The time it takes to format a diskette varies   
					directly with the type of format FORMAT has to   
					perform. Disk II formats are done in about 30   
					seconds (because there’s not much to do). A   
					full Elite Three format can take well over a   
					full minute (there is four times the storage to   
					he formatted than what is necessary for a Disk   
					II).   
					Eventually, you will get:   
					Page 10—9   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					FORMAT Complete   
					Format disk in which drive?   
					You are free to issue another command to do   
					another format at this point. when you have no   
					more formatting to do, make sure your CP/M sys-   
					tem diskette is back in drive A: and then just   
					answer the question with <RETURN>.   
					If you used drive A: anytime during your format-   
					ting, FORMAT will remember this and request:   
					Insert CP/M System disk in drive A:   
					Press RETURN   
					When you’ve got your system diskette back into   
					drive A:, type <RETURN>.   
					Important   
					Note: Unlike the INIT command under   
					Apple’s DOS, FORMAT does not place a copy of any   
					operating system onto the newly formatted disk-   
					ette. This means that the diskette will not   
					boot at all. You Apple will “hang” if you   
					attempt to boot the diskette or leave it in   
					drive A: when a transient command or program   
					finishes and returns control to CP/M (see Tran-   
					sient Commands in your CP/M manuals). Refer to   
					the COPY utility instructions for information on   
					how to place CP/M onto the new diskette.   
					Page 10-10   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					10.3. COPY Utility   
					The copy utility provides a means for you to   
					make backup copies of your diskettes. The en-   
					hancements made to the new COPY utility are   
					primarily just in the area of support for the   
					higher capacity Elite Series drives.   
					Alot of extra logic has been added to the COPY   
					utility to permit it to make backup copies of   
					lower capacity diskettes using higher capacity   
					drives. In addition, the way in which the Elite   
					Two and Elite Three drives boot CP/M (when oper-   
					ating in their full capacity mode) is slightly   
					different than for the Elite One and Disk II.   
					The new COPY takes this into account when per-   
					forming a system-only copy.   
					In order for COPY to be executed, CP/M must be   
					in command level and a diskette containing the   
					new COPY utility must be inserted in one of your   
					drives. The command to issue is:   
					<d> :COPY<RETURN>   
					where <d> is the drive in which the diskette   
					containing COPY is inserted.   
					Page 10—11   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					COPY signs-on by saying:   
					APPLE II CP/M   
					16 Sector Disk Copy Utility   
					Primary Copyright 1980 Microsoft   
					Portions Copyright 1982 RANA Systems   
					RANA Systems Version 1.1   
					* 
					You may find the “*” prompt to be just a little   
					lacking in clues to the correct responses, but   
					such a prompt is a tradition in CP/M, starting   
					back with the standard CP/M utility PIP.   
					The new COPY (just like the new FORMAT) is very   
					similar to its predecessor from Microsoft. The   
					command syntax which you can type following the   
					“*“ prompt is:   
					<target>:=<source>: [/S]<RETURN>   
					If you are already used to working with the   
					original COPY utility, then you will Quickly   
					notice Rana has changed two terms on you. What   
					would be a “master” diskette to the original   
					COPY is referred to as a “source” diskette by   
					the new COPY. And the original COPY’s “slave”   
					diskette is called the “target” diskette by the   
					new COPY. This change probably won’t throw you   
					for too big a loop.   
					<source> is the drive letter in which you plan   
					on placing (Or already have placed) the original   
					diskette you wish to be copied. <target> is the   
					Page 10-12   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					drive letter in which you plan on placing the   
					already formatted diskette which is to receive   
					the information from the original diskette.   
					<source> and <target> can he the same drive.   
					If you specify the “/S” option at the end of the   
					command, the you will he telling COPY to only   
					copy the CP/M operating system from the source   
					diskette to the target diskette without altering   
					any other information on the target diskette.   
					If you do not specify the “/S” option, then the   
					entire source diskette will be copied to the   
					target diskette.   
					The full diskette copy will completely replace   
					any previous information you had on the target   
					diskette. Just like with FORMAT, this previous   
					information will never he seen again.   
					Once again, the possibility of having various   
					different drive models intermixed on the same   
					system leads to certain restrictions as to their   
					use. COPY is very reliant upon how you have the   
					source and target drives defined under the CP/M   
					system. COPY asks CP/M for this information so   
					that it knows the type of drives with which it   
					will he dealing.   
					When performing a full diskette copy, three   
					variables influence the type of diskettes which   
					can he copied, what type of drives can he used   
					for the copy, and what type of target diskette   
					will result. These various combinations are   
					given in the following four tables:   
					Page 10—13   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					Source Diskette is Disk II Format   
					Source Drive   
					Target Drive   
					Target Disk   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Explained (1)   
					Disk II   
					Not allowed   
					Not allowed   
					Not allowed   
					Disk II   
					Not allowed   
					Not allowed   
					Not allowed   
					Explained (2)   
					Not allowed   
					Not allowed   
					Not allowed   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Page 10—14   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					Source Diskette is Elite One Format   
					Source Drive   
					Target Drive Target Disk   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite One   
					Explained (1)   
					Impossible   
					Elite One   
					Not allowed   
					Not allowed   
					Impossible   
					Explained (2)   
					Not allowed   
					Not allowed   
					Page 10-15   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					Source Diskette is Elite Two Format   
					Source Drive   
					Target Drive   
					Target Disk   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Elite Two   
					Explained (1)   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Explained (2)   
					Not allowed   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Page 10—16   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					Source Diskette is Elite Three Format   
					Source Drive   
					Target Drive   
					Target Disk   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Disk II   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Impossible   
					Elite Three   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Disk II   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite One   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Two   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Elite Three   
					Page 10-17   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					The explanations for the “explained”s in the   
					tables are as follows:   
					(1) The target diskette will contain a   
					backup of the source diskette, however   
					the target diskette cannot be read by   
					any other drive but an Elite Three.   
					This means that the target diskette   
					cannot be moved to the source drive   
					and used just as If it were the source   
					diskette. See explanation (2) for   
					what can be done with the target disk-   
					ette.   
					(2) COPY will assume that the source disk-   
					ette was one which was created under   
					the condition described in explanation   
					(1) above. These two conditions per-   
					mit Elite Threes to be used in making   
					backup copies of non-Elite Three disk-   
					ettes, even though the copy cannot be   
					used just like the original. The   
					target diskette created under (1)   
					above is only good for later “unback-   
					ing—up” the information by reversing   
					the drive models used for the source   
					and target drives. An Elite Three   
					backup of a non—Elite Three diskette   
					is not valid for use under anything   
					except COPY, and then only given these   
					two explanation conditions.   
					What if your system consists of a Disk II drive   
					and an Elite Two? Does this mean you can’t   
					Page 10—18   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					backup an Elite Two diskette? First glance at   
					the tables might indicate that such a conflict   
					occurs, but not really. In such a case you   
					would simply specify a single drive copy to the   
					COPY utility by specify both the source and   
					target drives as being your Elite Two. A dual—   
					drive copy can still be performed if you are   
					backing up a Disk II diskette, since the Elite   
					Two will work as both the source and target for   
					a Disk II copy, provided as Disk II defined   
					drive is involved in the copy somehow.   
					An important note to remember is that COPY does   
					not know exactly which drive models you have   
					placed in various positions, all it knows is   
					what you have specified to the currently booted   
					CP/M operating system (using PROFILE). There-   
					fore, if you have an Elite Two as drive B:, but   
					you‘ve told the currently booted CP/M that drive   
					B: is a Disk II, then you must treat the drive   
					like a Disk II when you look at the copy tables   
					listed earlier.   
					A studied analysis of the tables will reveal,   
					with the exception of the Elite Three, that the   
					lower capacity drive of the two specified for   
					the copy will always declare what type of copy   
					is to be performed. This is regardless of   
					whether or not the lower capacity drive is the   
					source or the target.   
					In addition, COPY will not FORMAT the target   
					diskette prior to starting the copy. The target   
					diskette must already have been pre—formatted   
					using the FORMAT utility. The diskette must be   
					formatted in the same format as listed for the   
					Page 10—19   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					target diskette in the preceding tables, with   
					the exception of the special Elite Three condi-   
					tions. In the Elite Three ”explained” case (1),   
					the target diskette must be formatted in an   
					Elite Three format. In the Elite Three “ex-   
					plained” case (2), the target diskette must be   
					formatted in the format correct for the target   
					drive’s type.   
					When making a backup copy of (for instance) an   
					Elite One diskette using an Elite One as the   
					source drive and an Elite Two as the target   
					drive, it is okay to place an Elite One format-   
					ted diskette into the Elite Two to use as the   
					target diskette, COPY will only attempt to use   
					the Elite One formatted areas on the diskette   
					since it will be copying an Elite One diskette.   
					The same is true for other copies of this type   
					in which the target drive has more capacity than   
					the source drive (excluding the Elite Three).   
					On system-only copies, the above tables do not   
					apply. System-only copies always assume that the   
					source diskette will be of the same type as the   
					source drive, and that the target diskette will   
					be of the same type as the target drive. This   
					allows you to copy a CP/M structured (for   
					instance) to boot off of a Disk II, and have   
					COPY restructure it and write it so that an   
					Elite Three can then boot it. The reverse is   
					also true. COPY will restructure an Elite Three   
					operating system so that a Disk II can then boot   
					it. However, the source and target diskettes   
					must be pre-formatted to be compatible with the   
					drive types which will be reading and writing   
					them. Check the PROFILE utility for information   
					Page 10-20   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					concerning “bootability” of system copies.   
					After you’ve plowed through all of the above   
					confusion, and finally decide you’ve chosen the   
					right command and then hit <RETURN>, COPY will   
					respond with:   
					Insert SOURCE disk into drive <source>:   
					Insert TARGET disk into drive <target>:   
					Press RETURN to begin   
					provided your <source> and <target> are two   
					different drives. If your <source> and <target>   
					are the same drive, then COPY will say:   
					Insert SOURCE disk and press RETURN   
					Insert the diskette(s) COPY requests, and then   
					press <RETURN>.   
					On single drive copies, COPY will first read in   
					as much information as it can into memory from   
					the source diskette, and then say:   
					Insert TARGET disk and press RETURN   
					You should then insert the requested diskette   
					and press <RETURN>.   
					Single drive copying will continue like this   
					until all the information is copied. Two drive   
					copies will run all the way through without any   
					assist from you.   
					Page 10-21   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					Once the copying is finished (single or two—   
					drive), COPY will say:   
					COPY Complete   
					Do you wish to make another copy?   
					If you answer <N><RETURN> to this question, COPY   
					will terminate. COPY’s response to your answer-   
					ing <Y><RETURN> to this question depends upon   
					whether you did a full diskette copy or a sys-   
					tem-only copy.   
					If you did a full diskette copy, COPY will ask   
					for the diskettes to be copied just like it did   
					the first time. If you did a system—only copy,   
					COPY will only ask for the target diskette. This   
					is because COPY was able to fit all of the   
					system information it is copying into memory at   
					one time. Therefore it does not need to read it   
					again off of the source diskette a second time.   
					Once you answer <N><RETURN> to the another   
					copy?” question, COPY will check to see if you   
					used drive A: anytime during your copying. If   
					you did, it will prompt you with:   
					Insert CP/M System disk into drive A:   
					Hit RETURN   
					This is just a reminder in case you removed the   
					CP/M system diskette to make a copy of some   
					other diskette. When the CP/M system diskette is   
					in drive A:, press <RETURN> and COPY will   
					terminate.   
					Page 10—22   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					Special Note: The only diskette restructuring   
					COPY will perform is during a system-only copy.   
					There is no way to convince COPY to restructure   
					and Elite One diskette (for instance) into an   
					Elite Two diskette. This can be done using the   
					“copy all files” feature of the PIP utility.   
					Refer to your CP/M manuals. If you have just a   
					single drive, you will also want to refer to the   
					SCLDRIVE utility instructions later in this   
					section.   
					Page 10—23   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					10.4.PROFILE Utility   
					The PROFILE utility is the heart of the enhanced   
					CP/M system. It is this utility which allows you   
					to tell CP/M where various drive models are   
					located on your system, and also allows you to   
					declare the drive as a different model (an Elite   
					Two as a Disk II, for example) to allow you to   
					read and create diskettes to be interchanged   
					with other Apple II CP/M systems.   
					PROFILE has absolutely no effect on the Elite   
					Controller card since the enhanced CP/M func-   
					tions with it completely automatically. En-   
					hanced CP/M does not need to be told to use all   
					four drives on the Elite Controller, and to only   
					use two drives on the Disk II controller; it’s   
					all automatic.   
					PROFILE is executed from CP/M command level by   
					typing:   
					<d> :PROFILE<RETURN>   
					where <d> is the drive in which the diskette   
					containing PROFILE is located.   
					PROFILE signs-on by saying:   
					Apple ][ CP/M   
					Drive Configuration Utility   
					Copyright (c) (p) 1982 RANA Systems   
					Version 1.1   
					* 
					Page 10—24   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					The “*” is the standard CP/M utility prompt to   
					indicate that the utility is waiting for a com—   
					mand.   
					The valid command syntax for PROFILE is:   
					[<u>:=]§<d>:<t>[<s>][,<d>:<t>[<s>]...]!*†   
					where <u> is the drive containing the copy of   
					the CP/M to be altered. <d> is the CP/M drive   
					who’s definition is to be altered within the   
					copy of the CP/M. <t> is the drive type to   
					which the drive is to be changed, as given   
					below. And <s> is the seek speed at which the   
					drive is to be positioned from track-to-track.   
					The “*” can replace the entire mess, telling   
					PROFILE to display the current system configura-   
					tion without making any changes.   
					The valid <t> entries are:   
					0 = Disk II   
					1 = Elite One   
					2 = Elite Two   
					3 = Elite Three   
					The valid <s> entries are:   
					S = Slow (all models)   
					M = Medium (all Elite models)   
					F = Fast (Elite Two and Three only)   
					The “<u>:” part is optional. If it is not   
					specified, then PROFILE will assume the change   
					is to be made to the currently booted in—memory   
					Page 10-25   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					copy of CP/M only, and no change to disk copies   
					will be made. This in-memory change would be   
					temporary, and would no longer exist once the   
					system was fully rebooted.   
					If the “<u>:=” is specified, then the change   
					will be made to the CP/M system on the diskette   
					in the specified drive, and no changes will be   
					made to the in-memory copy of CP/M.   
					The seek speed parameter is also optional. If   
					it is left off, PROFILE will default to the   
					correct seek speed for the drive model type you   
					specified.   
					Apart from various “insert disk” and other such   
					instructional messages, PROFILE basically has   
					only one primary line it prints over and over   
					again to reflect any changes it applies or to   
					give a listing of current settings. A sample of   
					this single line message would be:   
					H:+Rana Elite Three, Medium Seek.   
					AABCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCDDDDDDDDDDDD   
					The first line is the message, the second is a   
					little added template to assist in the   
					explanation of the various sections on the   
					message (it’s not printed by PROFILE).   
					The “A” section of the message (refer to second   
					line) is the drive for which the information   
					applies.   
					Page 10-26   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					The “B” section is either a “+“ or a space. If   
					a “+” is printed, that means that your system   
					does not currently have a controller card in it   
					which will allow talking to that drive. All   
					drives from a certain drive letter up through   
					drive P: (highest allowable CP/M drive) would   
					have “+”s, depending upon the number of control-   
					lers in your system. All drives from I: through   
					P: will have "+"s since enhanced CP/M only sup-   
					ports up to eight drives (A: through H:).   
					The “C” section concerns itself with the type of   
					drive model which is assigned to that drive   
					letter. This assignment is completely indepen-   
					dent of what type of drive is actually connected   
					to your Apple at that particular drive position.   
					What is printed at this position in the message   
					determines how CP/M will treat that particular   
					drive, regardless of whether or not the drive is   
					capable of being treated that way. Some exam-   
					ples of why you would “lie” to CP/M will come   
					later. Drives I: through P: will not report any   
					model type since the enhanced Apple II CP/M does   
					not support these drives.   
					The "D" section reports the seek speed at which   
					the drive will be positioned from track-to-track   
					by CP/M. This also is regardless of whether or   
					not the drive is capable of seeking at the given   
					speed. This field is printed for all drives   
					regardless of whether or not the enhanced CP/M   
					supports the drive. This is because very spe-   
					cialized machine language programs can do disk   
					I/O which bypasses the CP/M operating System,   
					but which still rely on the system disk control-   
					ler routines to position the drive for them.   
					Page 10-27   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					When a drive’s setting is changed, PROFILE will   
					print the message line for the drive twice,   
					preceeded by “Was” for the old setting of the   
					drive, and “Now” for the new setting of the   
					drive:   
					Was B:+Elite Three, Fast Seek.   
					Now B:+Disk II,   
					Slow Seek.   
					The best way to show the use of PROFILE is by   
					examples of various PROFILE commands:   
					A:=H:3,C:0,E:1<RETURN>   
					This command will make all changes to the system   
					diskette located in drive A: (A:=). The first   
					change will be to make drive H: an Elite Three   
					with the default seek speed of ‘fast (H:3).   
					The second change will be to make drive C: a   
					Disk II with the default seek speed of “slow”   
					(,C:0). The last change is to make drive E: an   
					Elite One with the default seek speed of “med-   
					ium” (,E:1).   
					G:1F,C:0F,D:0M<RETURN>   
					This coMMand will make all changes to the in-   
					memory (currently running) CP/M system and abso-   
					lutely no changes to any copies on any disk-   
					ettes. This would be a temporary change, only   
					lasting until the system is completely rebooted.   
					The first change is to make drive C: an Elite   
					One with an override for “fast” seeking (G:1F).   
					The override would only make sense if the drive   
					Page 10-28   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					was actually an Elite Two (which can seek fast)   
					which is to be restricted to acting like an   
					Elite One.   
					The second change is to make drive A: act like a   
					Disk II, but seek at the “fast” rate (,A:0F).   
					Once again, this would have to he an Elite Two   
					pretending to be a Disk II. This would be a   
					common temporary setting since it allows the   
					Elite Two to read a lower capacity Disk II   
					diskette, and restricts any writes the drive   
					makes to the diskette to be perfectly   
					interchangeable with a Disk II drive.   
					The last change is to make drive D: act like a   
					Disk II but seek at the “medium” seek rate   
					(,D:0M). This also would be a common temporary   
					setting since it obviously infers restricting an   
					Elite One to acting just like a Disk II to   
					insure that any diskette about to be up-   
					dated/created by the drive will interchange with   
					a Disk II drive.   
					Although possible, no changes to the setting for   
					drive A: should ever be made to the in-memory   
					system. All changes take effect immediately,   
					and since the diskette which was hooted in drive   
					A: would be of a “pre-change” format, the system   
					will “crash” when PROFILE is terminated and the   
					system is no longer able to read its own system   
					diskette.   
					Likewise, changes to settings for drive A: in   
					on-disk copies of CP/M have a direct effect on   
					the “bootability” of the diskettes. When the   
					copy of the operating system was placed onto the   
					Page 10—29   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					diskette (by COPY), it was structured to boot   
					for a particular type of drive. The setting for   
					drive A: within that on-disk operating system   
					must match the boot structure, or the boot will   
					fail.   
					When you use COPY to copy an operating system   
					from (for instance) an Elite One drive to an   
					Elite Two drive, COPY restructures the system   
					into a format compatible with booting off of the   
					Elite Two. However, COPY did not change the   
					configuration setting for drive A: on that new   
					system copy. If drive A: was not set as an Elite   
					Two on the system diskette which was cop-   
					ied, then you will need to use PROFILE to change   
					drive A:‘s setting in the Elite Two system disk-   
					ette to an Elite Two. Otherwise the diskette   
					will begin to boot, but end up crashing. The   
					same is true for other changes in booting struc-   
					tures.   
					Whenever PROFILE has to read and write a disk-   
					ette in a particular drive in order to make   
					changes to an on-disk copy of CP/M, it relies   
					completely upon the definition of the drive   
					within the in-memory CP/M to determine the   
					CP/M’s structure on the diskette. PROFILE ex-   
					pects the CP/M ‘s structure to match how the   
					drive is defined under the operating system.   
					This means that Elite Two system diskettes   
					should only be updated in drives defined under   
					the in-memory CP/M as Elite Two’s. The same   
					goes for the other types of system diskettes.   
					Also, keep in mind that any changes you make to   
					the in-memory CP/M take effect immediately.   
					Page 10-30   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					This can be a problem to be kept track of, but   
					also an advantage. It will allow you to temp-   
					orarily change the setting of a drive which is   
					capable off handling a particular diskette‘s   
					format so that the diskette can be modified.   
					(With the exception of the Elite Three, higher   
					capacity models can all handle the lower capaci-   
					ty models’ diskette formats. The Elite Three   
					can only handle, and is the only one which can   
					handle, the Elite Three format.)   
					The last two examples deal with finding out how   
					a particular copy of CP/M is currently config-   
					ured:   
					*<RETURN>   
					A simple “*” will result in PROFILE displaying   
					the settings in the in—memory CP/M for all   
					drives. No changes will be made.   
					A:=*<RETURN>   
					This example will cause PROFILE to display the   
					current setting in the on-disk CP/M in drive A:   
					for all drives. No changes will be made. A:   
					could be any drive.   
					For each change in a drive setting made in the   
					above examples, be it on—disk on in—memory,   
					PROFILE would display a “was” and “now” message   
					to show you the change made.   
					Page 10—31   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					Whenever you either display the current settings   
					within an on-disk CP/M system copy (<u>:=*), or   
					make a change to a setting (<u>:=<d>:<t>[<s>]),   
					PROFILE will first respond with:   
					Insert a system disk in <u>:.   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL-C> to abort.   
					where <u> is the drive you specified.   
					This gives you a chance to insert which ever   
					diskette contains the copy of the CP/M you wish   
					to examine or modify. When you have it in the   
					drive, just press <RETURN> and PROFILE will go   
					get the information it needs from the diskette.   
					If you type <ESC>, PROFILE will cancel the com-   
					mand and immediately return to the “*” prompt.   
					Once PROFILE reads the information, it will then   
					perform the function you requested. If your   
					request was for just a listing of the settings,   
					then the listing will be displayed and PROFILE   
					will return to the “*” prompt.   
					If you requested changes to be made, PROFILE   
					will make the changes, displaying all the "was”   
					and "now” messages, and then respond with:   
					Ready to update <u>:.   
					<RETURN> to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL-C> to abort.   
					PROFILE will then wait for you to allow it to   
					make the changes permanently to the diskette. If   
					the changes were all okay, type <RETURN>. If   
					Page 10—32   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					you no longer wish the diskette to he updated,   
					type <ESC> and PROFILE will leave the diskette   
					alone.   
					If you request PROFILE to do anything with the   
					in-memory CP/M, PROFILE will not need to ask you   
					to insert any diskettes. So, you will get an   
					immediate response to your request. But, before   
					PROFILE actually applies the changes directly to   
					the in—memory CP/M, it will say:   
					Ready to update in-memory system. <RETURN>   
					to continue/retry;   
					<ESC> or <CTRL-C> to abort.   
					This gives you a chance to change your mind   
					about any modifications to the in—memory system.   
					If you press <RETURN>, PROFILE will go ahead and   
					update the system. If you press <ESC>, PROFILE   
					will cancel the command and immediately return   
					to the “*” prompt.   
					Page 10—33   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					10.5. SGLDRIVE Utility   
					The SGLDRIVE utility is designed specifically   
					for CP/M users with only one drive. If you are   
					not such a user, the description of this utility   
					will not be of much use to you. If you are a   
					single drive user, this utility can prove to be   
					invaluable.   
					Single drive users (on an Apple or any other   
					CP/M system) quickly find that CP/M is not over-   
					ly friendly to them CP/M was not really de-   
					signed with only one drive in mind. The biggest   
					example of this is the PIP utility for which   
					SGLDRIVE was specifically designed (although it   
					can function in other applications as well).   
					PIP is a standard utility which is pare of the   
					CP/M system itself (from Digital Research), as   
					opposed to FORMAT and COPY which were added by   
					Microsoft and which strictly work under the   
					Apple II version of CP/M. PIP’s primary func-   
					tion (it has alot of functions, see your CP/M   
					manuals) is to copy individual files or groups   
					of files from one diskette onto another diskette   
					(or possibly the same diskette), without de-   
					stroying the other existing files on the target   
					diskette.   
					PIP’s problem is that if you specify the source   
					drive (on which PIP is to find the original   
					files) and the target drive (to which PIP is to   
					copy the files) as the same drive, PIP assumes   
					you want the copy of the file to go on the same   
					diskette as the source. This prevents single   
					drive users from copying individual files be-   
					Page 10—34   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					tween two different diskettes. SGLDRIVE solves   
					this not so little problem by doing a little   
					lieing to CP/M itself.   
					To get SGLDRIVE started, type:   
					<d>:SGLDRIVE   
					where <d> is the drive in which the diskette   
					containing SGLDRIVE is inserted.   
					After SGLDRIVE is loaded, it will sign-on with:   
					Enhanced Apple ][ CP/M   
					Dual to Single Drive Mapping Utility   
					Copyright (C) 1982 RANA Systems   
					Revision 1. 1   
					When SGLDRIVE is first executed, it takes a   
					small section of itself and copies it into some   
					storage space inside CP/M which is only used   
					when you have three or more drives. This little   
					piece of SGLDRIVE will remain inside CP/M until   
					you completely reboot your Apple. This is re-   
					ferred to as the “resident“ portion of SGLDRIVE.   
					Once this resident portion is in place, SGLDRIVE   
					will tell you:   
					B: now mapped to A:   
					This means that whenever CP/M or a utility/pro-   
					gram running under CP/M (PIP for instance) asks   
					CP/M to read or write some information from   
					drive B: (which, as a single drive user, you   
					won’t have), SGLDRIVE will display:   
					Page 10-35   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					Mount B:, Press <ESC>   
					This gives you a chance to remove the diskette   
					from your drive and insert whichever diskette   
					you want to pretend is in drive B:. When you   
					have the “drive B:" diskette in the drive, type   
					<ESC> and the resident portion of SGLDRIVE will   
					allow the read or write operation to continue.   
					When CP/M (or the program running under CP/M)   
					changes back to using drive A:, you will get:   
					Mount A:, Press <ESC>   
					Which gives you a chance to replace the “drive   
					B:” diskette with the “drive A:” diskette (the   
					system diskette).   
					Important   
					Note: Although SGLDRIVE allows you   
					exchange the disk in drive A: between the “drive   
					A:” diskette and the “drive B:” diskette as   
					required by CP/M, you cannot freely exchange   
					which diskettes you are using as the “drive A:”   
					diskette and the “drive B:” diskette. Once you   
					start using a particular diskette as the “drive   
					B:” diskette, you must stick with that diskette.   
					As far as CP/M is concerned, it is actually   
					dealing with two diskettes located in two dif-   
					ferent drives, and which are not being removed   
					and changed all the time.   
					There are very specific and defined times which   
					you can change the diskettes you are using. For   
					information on this, see the “R/O” error message   
					under “BDOS Error Messages” in your CP/M   
					manuals.   
					Page 10—36   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					In order to convince PIP to copy a file from one   
					diskette to another diskette using just one   
					drive, you would tell PIP to copy the file from   
					drive A:/B: to drive B:/A: (the other drive).   
					Then, whenever PIP needs to read or write from   
					the diskette which is not currently in the drive   
					at that particular time, the resident portion of   
					SGLDRIVE will allow you to change the diskettes.   
					Due to the way SGLDRIVE works, it would be   
					possible to use it with programs other than PIP,   
					but Rana ‘s making no promises. SGLDRIVE was   
					designed specifically to solve PIP vs single   
					drive problem, but with the possibility of help-   
					ing Out with other programs at the same time.   
					There is one particular type of program with   
					which SGLDRIVE will not work correctly at all.   
					SGLDRIVE should not be used with the various   
					system utilities which perform their own disk   
					reads and writes. These programs tend to bypass   
					the CP/M operating system for their disk reads   
					and writes sometimes and then use CP/M at other   
					times. This will completely confuse SGLDRIVE,   
					and it will not be able to keep track of which   
					diskette should be in the drive at what time.   
					Such programs include the FORMAT, COPY, PROFILE,   
					and ENHANCE utilities; except when used as out-   
					lined in the CP/M Enhancements section of this   
					manual. (Special considerations have been made   
					in the utilities for the enhancing process.)   
					Page 10-37   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					ENHANCED CP/M UTIL.   
					10.6. ENHANCE Utility   
					The ENHANCE utility is intended as a one-time-   
					only utility. Once you’ve performed the CP/M   
					enhancements outlined earlier in this manual,   
					ENHANCE is no longer needed. The COPY utility   
					is used to make new enhanced CP/M diskettes. It   
					is not necessary the use ENHANCE to keep enhanc-   
					ing every new CP/M system diskette you create.   
					The earlier CP/M enhancing instructions are   
					essentially the instructions for using ENHANCE.   
					Page 10—38   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SECTION 11   
					11. SECTION 11   
					This section has been intentionally omitted.   
					Page 11—1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					SECTION 11   
					This page intentionally left blank.   
					Page 11—2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					ACKNOWLEDGMENT   
					Rana Systems gratefully acknowledges the help   
					given by Quality Software in the compilation of   
					the following appendix.   
					We have borrowed some material from a section of   
					their highly informative book “Beneath Apple   
					DOS” by Don D. Worth and Pieter M. Lechner.   
					For further information on Apple Disk I/O we   
					suggest you refer to “Beneath Apple DOS”   
					Copyright 1981 Quality Software   
					Page A-1   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					This page intentionally left blank.   
					Pa g e A—2   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					APPENDIX A   
					A. DISKETTE DATA RECORDING   
					A. 1. Introduction   
					This appendix is designed to show in detail how   
					information is structured on a diskette, begin-   
					ning with a brief introduction to the hardware   
					involved.   
					A.2. Tracks and Sectors   
					Diskettes are divided into tracks and sectors   
					during the initialization process. Each track is   
					identified by its distance from the center of   
					the disk but, unlike the grooves of a record,   
					they are not connected in a continuous spiral. A   
					disk is similar to a record in that it is spun   
					at a constant speed and information is written   
					to or read from its surface with a read/write   
					head. Apple formats its diskettes into 35   
					tracks, numbered 0 to 34 with track 0 on the   
					outside and track 34 being the innermost.   
					The Elite One is capable of reading and writing   
					40 tracks (0 to 39). These five extra tracks   
					are located closer to the center of the disk   
					after Apple’s last track (34)   
					The dual headed Elite Two and Elite Three drives   
					require that the term “cylinder” be introduced.   
					Since the two heads allow the Elite Two and   
					Elite Three to read and write on both sides of   
					Page A-3   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					the diskette, these drives can actually access   
					two tracks without having to move the read/write   
					heads (which always move together) to another   
					pair of tracks. Each “pair of tracks” at which   
					the read/write head can stop (and successfully   
					read and write data) is called a cylinder.   
					Since the Elite One (and Apple’s Disk II) has   
					only one head, it has only one track for every   
					cylinder. This leads to the two terms (“track”   
					and “cylinder”) being interchanged rather freely   
					when discussing single headed disk drives (a   
					problem which tends to spill over into the dual   
					headed disk drive world). For the most part,   
					no problems of understanding arise from this   
					sloppy use of “computerese” (a very sacred lan-   
					guage).   
					This appendix will, in fact, continue this slop-   
					py exchange of these terms since, should you be   
					a user with a little computer experience, you   
					will already be used to the term “track”, and   
					“cylinder” probably leaves a bad taste in your   
					mouth (for now).   
					Like the Elite One, the Elite Two also has 40   
					cylinders; but the Elite Two is dual headed and   
					therefore has two tracks for every cylinder.   
					This gives the Elite Two a total of 80 tracks.   
					The Elite Three has 80 cylinders; and since it   
					is dual headed also, this gives it a total of   
					160 tracks.   
					Page A-4   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					The disk ann can physically position itself over   
					80 “phases”. To move an Elite One or Two past   
					one track (cylinder) to the next, two phases of   
					the stepper motor, which moves the arm, must be   
					cycled. This would suggest that data might be   
					stored on 80 tracks, but only the Elite Three is   
					equipped with heads which are capable of reading   
					and writing data on tracks which are so close   
					together. For the Elite One and Elite Two (and   
					Disk II) the resolution of the read/write heads   
					are such that attempts to use “half—tracks”   
					often invite complications.   
					A sector, a sub—division of a track, is the   
					smallest unit of “updateable” data on the disk-   
					ette and Apple has used two different track   
					formats to date. One divides the track into 13   
					sectors, the other into 16 sectors. The sect or—   
					ing does not use the index hole(s) provided on   
					most diskettes to locate the first sector of the   
					track. In stead DOS uses an extended “soft sec-   
					toring” format which takes up more space but,   
					ultimately allows more flexibility, and reduces   
					drive costs.   
					Since the existing Apple II operating systems   
					(DOS, CP/M, and Pascal) knew nothing of dual   
					headed disk drives like the Elite Two and Elite   
					Three, special (but very compatible) extensions   
					to Apple’s diskette format had to be made to   
					support these higher capacity drives. This was   
					done by leaving the format on the first side of   
					the diskette identical to Apple’s, but numbering   
					the sectors on the second side of the diskette   
					as sectors 16-31.   
					Page A-5   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					The following tables give an illustration of the   
					amount of data stored on a diskette under an   
					Enhanced DOS 3.3 format for all Elite models.   
					ELITE ONE   
					DISK ORGANIZATION   
					Cylinders   
					Tracks   
					Tracks   
					Sectors   
					Sectors   
					Sectors   
					Bytes   
					per Diskette : 40   
					per Cylinder : 1   
					per Diskette : 40   
					per Track   
					: 16   
					per Cylinder : 16   
					per Diskette : 640   
					per Sector   
					per Track   
					: 256   
					: 4096   
					Bytes   
					Bytes   
					Bytes   
					per Cylinder : 4096   
					per Diskette : 163840   
					DOS Reserved Cylinders per Diskette : 4   
					DOS Reserved Tracks per Diskette : 4   
					DOS Reserved Sectors per Diskette : 64   
					DOS Reserved Bytes   
					per Diskette : 16384   
					Available Cylinders   
					Available Tracks   
					Available Sectors   
					Available Bytes   
					per Diskette : 36   
					per Diskette : 36   
					per Diskette : 576   
					per Diskette : 147456   
					Note: The above figures are for an enhanced DOS   
					version 3.3.   
					Page A-6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					ELITE TWO   
					DISK ORGANIZATION   
					Cylinders   
					Tracks   
					Tracks   
					Sectors   
					16 Sectors   
					Sectors   
					Bytes   
					per Diskette : 40   
					per Cylinder : 2   
					per Diskette : 80   
					per Track   
					: 16   
					per Cylinder : 32   
					per Diskette : 1280   
					per Sector   
					per Track   
					: 256   
					: 4096   
					Bytes   
					Bytes   
					Bytes   
					per Cylinder : 8192   
					per Diskette : 327680   
					DOS Reserved Cylinders per Diskette : 2.5   
					DOS Reserved Tracks   
					DOS Reserved Sectors   
					DOS Reserved Bytes   
					per Diskette : 5   
					per Diskette : 80   
					per Diskette : 20480   
					Available Cylinders   
					Available Tracks   
					Available Sectors   
					Available Bytes   
					per Diskette : 37.5   
					per Diskette : 75   
					per Diskette : 1200   
					per Diskette : 307200   
					Note: The above figures are for an version 3.3.   
					enhanced DOS   
					Page A-7   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					ELITE THREE   
					DISK ORGANIZATION   
					Cylinders   
					Tracks   
					Tracks   
					Sectors   
					Sectors   
					Sectors   
					Bytes   
					per Diskette : 80   
					per Cylinder : 2   
					per Diskette : 160   
					per Track   
					: 16   
					per Cylinder : 32   
					per Diskette : 2560   
					per Sector : 256   
					Bytes   
					per Track   
					: 4096   
					Bytes   
					per Cylinder : 8192   
					Bytes   
					per Diskette : 655360   
					DOS Reserved Cylinders   
					DOS Reserved Tracks   
					DOS Reserved Sectors   
					DOS Reserved Bytes   
					per Diskette : 2.5   
					per Diskette : 5   
					per Diskette : 80   
					per Diskette : 20480   
					Available Cylinders   
					Available Tracks   
					Available Sectors   
					Available Bytes   
					per Diskette : 77.5   
					per Diskette : 155   
					per Diskette : 2480   
					per Diskette : 634880   
					Note: The above figures are for an enbanced DOS   
					version 3.3.   
					Page A-8   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					A. 3. Track Formatting   
					Data is recorded on the diskette uses a “group   
					coded recording” technique (GCR) which requires   
					that a bit with a value of 1 he recorded onto   
					the diskette within a given maximum period of   
					time. This method has some very significant   
					differences from other possible recording tech-   
					niques, but all of these differences only occur   
					at the hardware level of the computer. Once the   
					data is presented to the software (by the hard-   
					ware), no real difference can he detected.   
					This appendix will not attempt to explain the   
					OCR recording technique in the brief explanation   
					of data recording which preceeds the software   
					discussion. Instead, the “frequency modulated”   
					recording technique (FM) will he substituted.   
					This is due to a rather extensive difference in   
					the complexity of explaining the two techniques.   
					This will not hinder the remainder of the ex-   
					planation since, as was already mentioned, dif-   
					ferences from the software standpoint are com-   
					pletely hidden by certain rules which must be   
					obeyed when accessing Apple-type disk drives.   
					In the frequency modulated recording technique,   
					data written on and read back from the diskette   
					takes the form shown in the figure to follow,   
					which represents the binary data pattern 101.   
					The clock bits and data bits are interleaved, as   
					shown in the next figure. A data bit between   
					two clock bits represents a binary 1. An ab-   
					sence of that bit represents a binary 0. The   
					period between the edge of one clock bit and the   
					Page A-9   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					edge of the next we will define as a “bit cell”.   
					A byte would comprise eight consecutive bit   
					cells, the most significant of which is normally   
					referred to as cell 7 (with the least signifi—   
					cant being cell 0). Data is written and read   
					serially. During a write operation, bit cell 7   
					of each byte would be written first and 0 last.   
					when data is being read from the diskette the   
					same sequence applies. The third figure illus-   
					trates the relationship of bits within a byte.   
					These diagrams are a representation of what   
					occurs within the disk drive and controller   
					card. For the purpose of these illustrations,   
					the hardware interface to the diskette will be   
					represented as an eight bit “data latch”.   
					The final figure shows the three bits, 101,   
					being transferred from the data stream into the   
					data latch.   
					Page A-10   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					Fig. A-I: FM Recording Pattern   
					Page A-11   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					Fig. A-2: FM Bit Cell   
					Page A-12   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					DATA BITS   
					CLOCK BITS   
					Fig. A-3: FM Byte Recording   
					Page A-13   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					CONTROLLER SHIFT   
					REGISTER   
					DATA ON DISK   
					Fig. A-4: Reading Data   
					Page A-14   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					The following figure shows how writing data can   
					be illustrated in the same way. The clock bits   
					that were separated from the data must be inter-   
					leaved with the data as it is written. Notice   
					that, while in write mode, 0’s (zeros) are being   
					brought into the data latch to replace data   
					being written.   
					The Software must ensure the latch is loaded and   
					Instructed to write in 32 cycle intervals. If   
					not, zero bits will continue to be written every   
					four cycles which is how “self-sync” bytes (ex-   
					plained later) are created.   
					Page A-15   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					CONTROLLER SHIFT   
					REGISTER   
					DATA ON DISK   
					Fig. A-5: Writing Data   
					Page A-16   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					A.4. Fields   
					The two types of fields on a diskette are the   
					Address and the Data fields which both contain a   
					prologue, data area, checksum, and epilogue.   
					Each field on a track is separated from adjacent   
					fields by a number of bytes, called “gaps”.   
					All gaps are made up in the same way comprising   
					self-sync hexadecimal FF‘s, and vary only in the   
					number of bytes they contain.   
					The first figure below shows a portion of a   
					typical track divided into its major compo-   
					rients.   
					The three different types of gaps on a track are   
					made up of self—sync or auto—sync bytes, so—   
					called because they automatically bring the   
					hardware into sync with data bytes on the disk—   
					ette.   
					A self-sync byte is defined to be a hexadecimal   
					FF with a difference: it is a ten bit byte,   
					rather than an eight bit byte. Its two extra   
					bits are zeros, as shown in the second figure.   
					A self—sync is generated by using a 40 cycle   
					(slightly less than a microsecond) loop while   
					writing an FF. A bit is written every four   
					cycles, so two of the zero bits brought into the   
					data latch while the FF was being written are   
					also written to the disk, making the ten bit   
					byte.   
					Page A-17   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					Fig. A-6: Track Fomatting   
					Page A—18   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					Normal Byte Hex FF   
					1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1   
					Self-Sync Byte Hex FT   
					1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0   
					Fig. A-7: Self-Sync Byte   
					Five self-sync bytes are sufficient to show that   
					the hardware is reading valid data because the   
					hardware requires the first bit of a byte to be   
					a 1 (an Apple-GCR restriction).   
					As long as the disk is left in read mode, it   
					will continue to correctly interpret the data   
					unless there is an error on the track.   
					A.5. Gaps   
					The size of the three gap types will vary from   
					drive to drive and even from track to track.   
					During initialization (INIT) DOS will start with   
					large gaps and make them smaller until a   
					complete track can be written without overlap-   
					ping itself.   
					Page A-19   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					A minimum of five self-sync bytes must be main-   
					tained for each gap type, resulting in reason-   
					ably uniform gap sizes within each track.   
					A.5.1.Gap 1   
					This is the first data written to a track during   
					initialization. It originally comprises 128   
					bytes of self—sync, a large enough area to en-   
					sure that all parts of the track contain data.   
					Since the speed of a particular drive may vary,   
					the total length of the track in bytes is uncer—   
					tam and the percentage occupied by data is   
					unknown.   
					The initialization process is set up so that,   
					even on drives of differing speeds, the last   
					data field written will overlap Gap 1, provid-   
					ing continuity.   
					A.5.2.Gap 2   
					This appears after each Address field and before   
					each Data field, its length varying from five to   
					ten bytes on a normal drive. Gap 2 primarily   
					provides time for the data in an Address field   
					to be decoded before a read or write is ini—   
					tiated.   
					If the gap is too short, the start of the Data   
					field could spin past while DOS was still won-   
					dering if this was the sector to be read.   
					Page A-20   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					When a data field is written there is na guaran-   
					tee that the write will occur in the same spot   
					each time because the drive which is rewriting   
					the data field may not be the one which actually   
					INITed, or originally wrote it. Since the speed   
					of the drives can vary, it is perfectly possible   
					the write could start in mid-byte.   
					Normally, when writing a data field, five self-   
					sync bytes are written prior to writing the data   
					field itself. This is because the five bytes   
					help place the data field near its original   
					location. Secondly, the five self-sync bytes are   
					the minimum number required to guarantee   
					read—synchronization, as demonstrated in the   
					figure below:   
					Page A-21   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					Fig. A-8: Read Syncronizing   
					Page A-22   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					Probably, at least one sync byte will be des-   
					troyed when writing a Data field because, just   
					as in reading bits on a track, the write may not   
					begin on a byte boundary, thus altering an ex-   
					isting byte. See first figure below.   
					A.5.3. Gap 3   
					This appears after each data field and before   
					each address field. Though it is similar to Gap   
					2, it is longer, generally ranging from 14 to 24   
					bytes in length. It allows the additional time   
					necessary to handle the data before the next   
					sector is read.   
					The length of this Gap is not as vital as that   
					of Gap 2 because the DOS can always wait for   
					the next spin under the read/write head if the   
					address field has been missed, a maximum one   
					turn of the diskette. Since address fields are   
					never rewritten, there is no problem with this   
					gap providing sync, because only the first part   
					of the gap can be overwritten or damaged, as   
					demonstrated in the second figure.   
					The address field contains the ‘address’ or   
					identifying information about the data field   
					which follows it. The volume, track, and sector   
					number of any given sector can be thought of as   
					its address. The third figure gives a more de-   
					tailed illustration of its components.   
					Page A-23   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					initially   
					write begins here   
					After Writing   
					Fig. A-9: Unsyncronized Write   
					Page A-24   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					OLD   
					DATA   
					FIELD   
					ADDRESS   
					GAP 2   
					GAP 3   
					INFORMATION   
					NEW   
					DATA   
					FIELD   
					Fig. A-10: Data Field Shifting   
					Page A-25   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					D5 AA 96 XX YY XX YY XX YY XX YY DE AA EB   
					Prologue   
					Volume   
					Track   
					Sector Checksum   
					Epilpgue   
					4-plus-4 ENCODED   
					DATA BYTE- D D D D D D D D   
					7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0   
					XX- 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D   
					7 
					5 
					3 
					1 
					0 
					YY- 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D   
					6 
					4 
					2 
					Fig. A-11: Address Field   
					Page A—26   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					The prologue comprises three bytes which form an   
					unique sequence found in no other component of   
					the track, enabling DOS to locate an address   
					field almost without chance of an error. The   
					three bytes are $D5, $AA, and $96. The first   
					two are reserved, thus ensuring the uniqueness   
					of the prologue while the $96 indicates that the   
					data following is an address field rather than a   
					data field.   
					The address information follows next, comprising   
					volume, track, and sector numbers, and a check-   
					sum, all of which is vital if DOS is to know   
					where it is positioned on a particular diskette.   
					The checksum is computed by exclusive-ORing the   
					first three pieces of information and is used to   
					verify its integrity.   
					The epilogue contains the three bytes $DE, $AA,   
					and $EB, the last one of which is always written   
					during initialization but is never verified when   
					an address field is read. The epilogue bytes   
					are often referred to as "bit-slip marks" which   
					provide assurance that the drive is still in   
					sync with the bytes on the diskette. These bytes   
					are not vital but are a useful double-   
					check. Like the address field, the data field   
					comprises a prologue, data, checksum, and an   
					epilogue as shown in following figure.   
					Page A-27   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					D5 AA AD 342 BYTES DATA xx DE AA EB   
					Prologue   
					Data(16 Sector) Checksum   
					Epilougue   
					Fig. A-12: Data Field   
					Page A—28   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					The prologue differs in the third byte. The   
					bytes are $D5, $AA and $AD also forming an   
					unique sequence which enables DOS to locate the   
					start of the sector’s data, which consists of   
					342 (GCR) encoded bytes, and is followed by a   
					checksum byte used to verify the integrity of   
					the field just read. The epilogue is identical   
					in its function to that in the Address field.   
					A. 6. Data Field Encoding   
					Since it is not possible to read all 256 possi-   
					ble byte values (an Apple-GCR restriction), data   
					written to the diskette must be encoded. This is   
					done in three different ways:   
					1. This first method, currently used in address   
					fields, involves writing a data byte as two disk   
					bytes. One contains even bits, the other the   
					odd bits, thus requiring 512 “disk” bytes for   
					each 256 byte sector of data. Using this tech-   
					nique for sector data provides for no more than   
					10 sectors per track (about 88K of data per   
					diskette, or 72K of space available to the user;   
					typical for 5 7/4K single density drives).   
					Encoding the data in this way would be very   
					similar to the frequency modulated encoding of   
					data.   
					2. The second method allows 12 sectors per   
					track. It involves a 5-plus-3 split of the data   
					bits (as opposed to a 4—plus—4). Each byte   
					written to the diskette contains five actual   
					data bits, rather than four, thus requiring 410   
					Page A-29   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					“disk” bytes to store a 256 byte sector permit-   
					ting a full 13 sectors per track.   
					3. A hardware modification (the P6 PROM on   
					Apple’s Disk II controller card) allowed the   
					development of 16 sectors per track, providing a   
					23% increase in storage over the 13 sector for-   
					mat. This is possible because of a 6-plus—2   
					split of the data, and the PROM allowing two   
					consecutive zero bits in data bytes.   
					The storage and retrieval of information had   
					been restricted in 13 sector format by the re-   
					quirement that a disk byte have the high bit set   
					and, in addition, no two consecutive bits could   
					be zero. The odd-even 4-plus-4 technique meets   
					these requirements. Each data byte is repre-   
					sented as two bytes, containing odd and even   
					bits respectively. (See first figure.) Note   
					that the unused bits are all set to one to   
					guarantee meeting the two requirements.   
					The 4—plus—4 technique is used to store the   
					information (volume, track, sector, checksum)   
					contained in the address field. It is quite   
					easy to decode the data, since the byte with the   
					odd bits is simply shifted left and logically   
					ANDed with the byte containing the even bits as   
					shown in the second figure.   
					The major difficulty with the above technique is   
					that it occupies a lot of space on the track, so   
					the 5—plus—3 technique was developed, so named   
					because it splits the bytes into five bits plus   
					three bits and not in half as with the above.   
					Page A-30   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					ON DISK   
					1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D   
					1 
					IN MEMORY   
					7 
					5 
					3 
					D D D D D D D D   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					2 
					1 
					0 
					1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D   
					6 
					4 
					2 
					0 
					Fig. A-13: 4-plus-4 Encoding   
					Page A-31   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 SHIFT LEFT   
					7 
					5 
					3 
					1 
					1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D   
					6 
					4 
					2 
					0 
					D D D D D D D D   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					2 
					1 
					0 
					Fig. A-14: 4—plus-4 Decoding   
					Page A-32   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					A byte would have the form OOOXXXXX where X is a   
					valid data bit. This byte could range in value   
					from $00 to $1F, a total of 32 different values.   
					There are 34 valId “disk” bytes, ranging from   
					$AA to $FF, which meet the two requirements   
					(high bit set, no consecutive zero bits). Two   
					bytes, $D5 and $AA are reserved bytes thus al—   
					lowing an exact mapping between five bit data   
					bytes and eight bit “disk” bytes.   
					The 256 bytes that will make up a sector must be   
					translated to five bit bytes by a special “pre—   
					nibble” routine within DOS‘s RWTS which involves   
					bit rearrangement. The figure below, shows the   
					before and after of the routine. On the left is   
					a buffer of eight bit data bytes. Each byte in   
					this buffer is given a letter (A, B, C, etc) and   
					each bit a number (7 through 0). The right side   
					shows the results of the transformation. The   
					primary buffer contains five distinct areas of   
					five bit bytes (the top three bits of the eight   
					bit bytes zero filled) and the secondary buffer   
					contains three areas which gave rise to the 5-   
					plus—3 name.   
					Page A-33   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					800   
					833   
					0 0 0 A A A A A   
					3 
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					A A A A A A A A   
					0 0 0 B B B B B   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					2 
					1 
					0 
					866   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					B B B B B B B B   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					2 
					1 
					0 
					C C C C C C C C   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					2 
					1 
					0 
					D D D D D D D D   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					2 
					1 
					0 
					0 0 0 C C C C C   
					899   
					800   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					E E E E E E E E   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					2 
					1 
					0 
					0 0 0 D D D D D   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					0 0 0 E E E E E   
					7 
					6 
					5 
					4 
					3 
					900   
					933   
					0 0 0 A A A D E   
					2 
					1 
					0 
					2 
					2 
					0 0 0 B B B D E   
					966   
					999   
					2 
					1 
					0 
					1 
					1 
					0 0 0 C C C D E   
					2 
					1 
					0 
					0 
					0 
					Fig. A-15: 5-plus-3 Encodng   
					Page A-34   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					A total of 410 bytes is necessary to store the   
					original 256. This is calculated by finding the   
					total bits of data (256 x 8 = 2048) and dividing   
					by the number of bits per byte (2048 / 5 =   
					409.6) with two bits being unused. The data is   
					then transformed to valid “disk” bytes. This   
					involves simply looking at the following table.   
					Nybblized Data = Disk Byte   
					00 = AB   
					01 = AD   
					02 = AE   
					03 = AF   
					04 = B5   
					05 = B6   
					06 = B7   
					07 = BA   
					08 = BB   
					09 = BD   
					0A = BE   
					0S = BF   
					0C = D6   
					0D = D7   
					0E = DA   
					0F = DB   
					10 = DD   
					11 = DE   
					12 = DF   
					13 = EA   
					14 = EB   
					15 = ED   
					16 = EE   
					17 = EF   
					18 = F5   
					19 = F6   
					lA = F7   
					1B = FA   
					1C = FB   
					1D = FD   
					1E = FE   
					1F = FF   
					* AA and D5 are reserved bytes   
					Fig. A-16: 5-plus-3 Conversion Table   
					Page A-35   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					The data field has a checksum, similar to that   
					in the address field, to verify data. It also   
					involves exclusive-ORing data in pairs before it   
					is transformed by the look-up table above, best   
					illustrated by the figures below.   
					The read routine must read a byte, transform it   
					and store it, all in less than 32 cycles (time   
					to write a byte) or the information is lost. A   
					checksum computation to decode data greatly   
					speeds up the operation. As data is read from a   
					sector, the accumulator contains the cumulative   
					result of all previous bytes exclusive-ORed   
					together. The value of the accumulator after   
					any exclusive-OR is the actual data byte for   
					that point in the series. (Second figure.)   
					A third encoding technique, similar to the 5-   
					plus—3, still calls for the high bit to be set   
					but the byte may now contain one (and only one)   
					pair of consecutive zeros. This allows a great-   
					er number of valid bytes and permits the use of   
					a 6-plus—2 technique.   
					A six bit byte would have the form OOXXXXXX with   
					values $00 to $3F for a total of 64 different   
					values. With the relaxed requirements for valid   
					“disk” bytes, there are 69 different bytes ($96   
					to $FF). After removing the two reserved bytes   
					($AA and $D5) there are 67 “disk” bytes with   
					just 64 needed. With the mapping one to one   
					(with at least two adjacent bits set, excluding   
					bit 7) exactly 64 valid “disk” values are left.   
					The initial transformation is achieved by the   
					new prenibble routine with the results shown in   
					the last figure.   
					Page A-36   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					MEMORY   
					DISK   
					DATA   
					NYBBLES   
					0 
					Byte 00   
					EOR   
					955   
					955   
					Byte 01   
					Byte 02   
					EOR   
					954   
					954   
					EOR   
					953   
					901   
					Byte 85   
					Byte 86   
					EOR   
					900   
					900   
					EOR   
					800   
					800   
					EOR   
					Byte 87   
					Byte 88   
					801   
					801   
					EOR   
					802   
					8FD   
					Byte 340   
					Byte 341   
					EOR   
					8FE   
					8FE   
					EOR   
					8FF   
					Byte 342   
					(checksum) 8FF   
					Fig. A-17: Data Encoding   
					Page A-37   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					EFFECTIVE   
					ACTION   
					MEMORY   
					DISK DATA   
					BYTE 00 ->   
					BYTE O1 ->   
					BYTE 02 ->   
					NYBBLES   
					-> $855   
					-> $854   
					-> $853   
					-> EOR 0   
					-> EOR $855   
					-> EOR $854   
					6-plus-2   
					D 
					E 
					C 
					O 
					D 
					I 
					N 
					G 
					BYTE 85 ->   
					BYTE 86 ->   
					BYTE 87 ->   
					BYTE 88 ->   
					-> EOR $801   
					-> EOR $800   
					-> EOR $800   
					-> EOR $801   
					-> $800   
					-> $800   
					-> $801   
					-> $802   
					TABLE   
					BYTE 340 ->   
					BYTE 341 ->   
					BYTE 342 ->   
					-> EOR $8FD   
					-> EOR $8FE   
					-> EOR $8FF   
					-> $8FE   
					-> $8FF   
					valid   
					-> 0 if data is   
					FIG. A-18: DATA DECODING   
					Page A-38   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					800   
					900   
					956   
					Fig. A-19: 6-plus—2 Encoding   
					Page A-39   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					A total of 342 bytes are needed, shown by find-   
					ing the total number of bits (256 x 8 = 2048)   
					and dividing by the number of bits per byte   
					(2048 / 6 = 341.33). The transformation from the   
					six bit bytes to valid data bytes is also   
					performed by a one to one mapping, illustrated   
					in the figure below.   
					Again, the stream of data bytes written to the   
					diskette are a product of exciusive-ORs, similar   
					to the 5-plus-3 technique shown above.   
					Nybblized Data = Disk Byte   
					00 = 96   
					01 = 97   
					02 = 9A   
					03 = 9B   
					04 = 9D   
					05 = 9E   
					06 = 9F   
					07 = A6   
					08 = A7   
					09 = AB   
					0A = AC   
					0B = AD   
					0C = AE   
					0D = AF   
					0E = B2   
					0F = B3   
					10 = B4   
					11 = B5   
					12 = B6   
					13 = B7   
					14 = B9   
					15 = BA   
					16 = BB   
					17 = BC   
					18 = BD   
					19 = BE   
					lA = BF   
					lB = CD   
					1C = CD   
					1D = CE   
					lB = CF   
					1F = D3   
					20 = D6 30 = ED   
					21 = D7 31 = EE   
					22 = D9 32 = EF   
					23 = DA 33 = F2   
					24 = DE 34 = F3   
					25 = DC 35 = F4   
					26 = DD 36 = F5   
					27 = DE 37 = F6   
					28 = DF 38 = F7   
					29 = E5 39 = F9   
					2A = E6 3A = FA   
					2B = E7 3B = FB   
					2C = E9 3C = FC   
					2D = EA 3D = FD   
					2E = EB 3E = FE   
					2F = EC 3F = FF   
					* AA and D5 are reserved bytes.   
					Fig. A-20: 6-plus-2 Conversion Table   
					Page A-40   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					A. 7. Sector Interleaving   
					This process involves staggering sectors on a   
					track to improve access times. There is usually   
					a delay between reading or writing one sector   
					and reading or writing the next sector. This   
					delay usually depends on the user’s program and   
					can vary greatly.   
					If sectors are stored in numerically ascending   
					order, it may take a full revolution of the   
					diskette before the next sector can be accessed   
					(unless the application was extremely fast).   
					Rearranging the sectors into a different order   
					(interleaving) speeds up accessing.   
					On DOS 3.2.1 and earlier versions, the 13 sec-   
					tors are physically interleaved on the diskette.   
					Since DOS is booted from ascending sequential   
					sectors and files are generally stored in de-   
					scending sector order, no single interleaving   
					technique works well for both booting and se-   
					quentially accessing a file.   
					To maximize performance in DOS 3.3, the inter-   
					leaving is done in the software. The 16 sectors   
					are placed on the diskette in numerically   
					ascending order and are not physically inter-   
					leaved. A table is used to translate the phys-   
					ical sector number into a soft sector number   
					used by DOS.   
					Page A-41   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					For example, if the sector number found on a   
					disk were a 2, this is used as an offset into a   
					table where the number $0B is found. Thus DOS   
					treats the physical sector 2 as sector 11 ($0B),   
					presenting no problem If RWTS is used for disk   
					access.   
					To eliminate access differences between reading   
					and booting files, DOS is actually loaded back-   
					wards into memory in descending sequential order   
					during booting, just as files are accessed.   
					Thus, one interleaving cuts disk access time.   
					DOS, CP/M, and Pascal diskettes all use software   
					interleaving though each uses a different sector   
					order. The figure below gives the standard in-   
					terleave tables for each operating system.   
					For the dual headed Elite Two and Three drives,   
					the sector interleaving tables within the   
					Rana enhanced operating systems are extended to   
					a full 32 sectors. This is due to the fact that   
					the enhanced operating systems treat each   
					cylinder as a single track, with sectors 0-15 on   
					the first side (or first true track) and sectors   
					16—31 on the second side (or second true track).   
					Due to the way in which the Rana dual headed   
					diskette formatting utilities operate, it is not   
					sensible to interleave sectors between the two   
					sides of the diskette. Therefore the sectors on   
					the first side are interleaved with themselves,   
					and the sectors on the second side are inter-   
					leaved with themselves.   
					Page A-42   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					Disk DOS CP/M Pas. Disk DOS CP/M Pas.   
					00 00   
					01 13   
					02 11   
					03 09   
					04 07   
					05 05   
					06 03   
					07 01   
					08 14   
					09 12   
					10 10   
					11 08   
					12 06   
					13 04   
					14 02   
					15 15   
					00 00   
					03 02   
					06 04   
					09 06   
					12 08   
					15 10   
					02 12   
					05 14   
					08 01   
					11 03   
					14 05   
					01 07   
					04 09   
					07 11   
					10 13   
					13 15   
					16   
					17   
					18   
					19   
					20   
					21   
					22   
					23   
					24   
					25   
					26   
					27   
					28   
					29   
					30   
					31   
					16 16   
					29 29   
					27 22   
					25 25   
					23 28   
					21 31   
					19 18   
					17 21   
					30 24   
					28 27   
					26 30   
					24 17   
					22 20   
					20 23   
					18 26   
					31 29   
					16   
					18   
					20   
					22   
					24   
					26   
					28   
					30   
					17   
					19   
					21   
					23   
					25   
					27   
					29   
					31   
					Fig. A-21: Standard Systen Interleaves   
					Page A-43   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. A - DISK I/O   
					This page intentionally left blank.   
					Page A—44   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. B - DOS NOTES   
					B. DOS TECHNICAL NOTES   
					This section reveals the extensions and altera-   
					tions made to certain DOS calls. If you are not   
					a machine/assembly language programmer, this   
					section will probably make little sense to you.   
					None of this information need be understood to   
					use the enhanced DOS.   
					The information outlined in this section is   
					proprietary to Rana Systems. It is supplied to   
					you strictly for your own enlightenment. If you   
					wish to make use of this information for your   
					own private non-commercial purposes, please feel   
					free. However, due to the fact that this infor-   
					mation extends beyond the point of normal DOS   
					usage, Rana Systems will not furnish any addi-   
					tional support concerning the information pro-   
					vided in this section.   
					This section relies upon the reader being famil-   
					iar with interfacing programs to the three main   
					segments of DOS. Information concerning these   
					interfaces is split between two manuals: Apple’s   
					The DOS Manual and Quality Software’s Beneath   
					Apple DOS. Quality Software’s manual is by far   
					the more informative concerning machine level   
					interfacing to the DOS File Manager and RWTS,   
					while it leaves the explanation of the Command   
					Interpreter’s text commands to Apple’s manual.   
					Page B-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. B - DOS NOTES   
					B.1. Command Interpreter Alterations   
					There are only two changes made to the command   
					interpreter from the user’s or program’s point   
					of view. The first is to allow the specifica-   
					tion of a “,D3” or “,D4” parameter on commands.   
					This allows the user to specify the third or   
					fourth drive on an Elite Controller.   
					The second alteration was to "shut down the   
					command interpreter’s INIT. This was necessary   
					since the majority of the diskette initializa-   
					tion code (located in the File Manager and RWTS)   
					could not be supported for all four drive types   
					(three Rana Elites and one Apple Disk II).   
					When an INIT command is issued under an unen—   
					hanced DOS, it does three things: first, the   
					RWTS section formats the diskette leaving all   
					sectors empty; second, the File Manager initial-   
					izes the VTOC and directory sectors and then   
					places a slave copy of DOS onto the diskette so   
					it can be booted; and last, the command inter-   
					preter performs a SAVE command to save the hello   
					file which was in memory at the time.   
					Under the modified DOS, the only thing which   
					will happen is the "SAVE”. - This permits the   
					user to pre-format a diskette with the supplied   
					FORMAT utility, and then use that diskette to   
					fool any application program which may insist   
					upon issuing an "INIT” command. Note that the   
					hello file name specified when using FORMAT will   
					not be changed should a different name be used   
					when the “INIT’ command is issued. However, the   
					file saved by issuing the “INIT” command will be   
					Page B-2   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. B - DOS NOTES   
					under the name specified on the “INIT” command.   
					B. 2. File Manager Alterations   
					The only alteration from a program interface   
					standpoint to the File Manager was to shut down   
					the disk initialization function call. This was   
					done simply by having the File Manager return   
					back to the caller without performing the ini-   
					tialization. The File Manager will return a “no   
					error” condition so that the program making the   
					call can continue.   
					The File Manager was originally willing to ac-   
					cept a specification of drive 3 or 4 without any   
					complaints. For the most part, the File Manager   
					assumes that the calling program knows what it   
					is talking about and isn't supplying invalid   
					parameters.   
					B. 3. RWTS Alterations   
					The major change to the RWTS calling interface   
					is identical to the change~ made to the File   
					Manager. When a call to initialize a diskette   
					is made to the RWTS, a simple “no error” return   
					will be performed.   
					Apart from the ignoring of the initialize func-   
					tion call, RWTS also has an extension to the “no   
					operation” function call. (“No operation” ac-   
					tually means that RWTS is to seek the head to   
					Page B—3   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. B - DOS NOTES   
					the desired track and nothing else.) When a “no   
					Operation” call is made to the enhanced RWTS,   
					and the sector number in the RWTS parameter list   
					is set to $FF, a “formatting error” ($08) will   
					be returned and the carry flag set. This is a   
					way for the application program to determine   
					whether or not an enhanced DOS is currently in   
					use since a non—enhanced DOS would not care   
					about the sector number during a “no operation”   
					call.   
					The enhanced DOS will return the error condition   
					without selecting any drives or performing any   
					seeks. in addition, the [AY] register pair will   
					be returned pointing to the base address of the   
					drive configuration table located within the   
					enhanced DOS.   
					The configuration table is 28 bytes Long, pro-   
					viding a one byte entry for each of the 4 drives   
					per 7 slots of controller cards possible. The   
					entry at [AY]+$00 is for slot 1 drive 1,   
					[AY)+$01 is for slot 1 drive 2, [AY]+$1A is for   
					slot 7 drive 3, and [Ay]+$1B is for slot 7 drive   
					4.   
					Page B-4   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. B - DOS NOTES   
					The high four bits (7-4) of each entry are the   
					drive type code, the next three bits (3-1) are   
					the seek rate code, and the low bit (0) is the   
					single phase per cylinder flag.   
					0000 XXXX = Disk II   
					0001 XXYX = Elite One   
					0010 XXXX = Elite Two   
					0011 XXXX = Elite Three   
					XXXX 000X = Spiral Cam Seek Rate   
					XXXX 001X = Lead Screw Seek Rate   
					XXXX 0l0X = Band Pulley Seek Rate   
					XXXX XXX0 = Two Phases per Cylinder   
					XXXX XXX1 = One Phase per Cylinder   
					An additional piece of information can also be   
					obtained by using the [AY] pointer returned by   
					the enhanced DOS. That is the version number of   
					the enhancements applied to the DOS in use. It   
					is stored as a word at location [AY]+$1C and   
					[AY]$ iD, low byte first, high byte last. The   
					version is kept in binary coded decimal (BCD) in   
					which the hexadecimal digits $WXYZ would repre-   
					sent the version number WX.YZ. The low byte (YZ)   
					is the minor revision number, and the high byte   
					(WX) is the major revision number.   
					Page B—5   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. B - DOS NOTES   
					This page intentionally left blank.   
					Page B-6   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. C - CP/M NOTES   
					C. CP/M TECHNICAL NOTES   
					This section reveals the extensions made to   
					certain CP/M Z80 BIOS calls and 6502 RWTS calls.   
					If you are not a machine/assembly language pro-   
					grammer, this section will probably make little   
					sense to you. None of this information need be   
					understood to use the enhanced CP/M.   
					The information outlined in this section is   
					proprietary to Rana Systems. It is supplied to   
					you strictly for your own enlightenment. If you   
					wish to make use of this information for your   
					own private non-commercial purposes, please feel   
					free. However, due to the fact that this infor-   
					mation extends beyond the point of normal CP/M   
					usage, Rana Systems will not furnish any addi-   
					tional support concerning the information pro-   
					vided in this section.   
					This section relies upon the reader being famil-   
					iar with Digital Research’s CP/M 2.2 Alteration   
					Guide. The Alteration Guide is not provided by   
					Microsoft in the Apple II CP/M manuals primarily   
					because the implementing of CP/M on an Apple is   
					far more complex than for the standard Z8O/8080   
					computers on which Digital Research’s guide is   
					based.   
					Page C-1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. C - CP/M NOTES   
					C.1. Z8O BIOS Call Extensions   
					The only BIOS call which has had extensions made   
					to it is the SELDSK vector (BOOT+1BH). Digital   
					Research defines that, prior to calling, the   
					[C] register is to be loaded with the drive   
					number (0-15=A:-P:) which is to be used for any   
					further disk I/O calls. The remaining registers   
					should be assumed to be in an undefined state.   
					Upon return, [HL] must contain the address of   
					the disk parameter header (DPH) associated with   
					that drive provided the drive can be selected   
					(if it exists). If the drive is not selectable,   
					then [HL] must return containing OOOOH. The   
					remaining registers (including [C]) can be unde-   
					fined upon return.   
					Since CP/M is an 8080 operating system, Digital   
					Reseach makes no declarations concerning the Z80   
					[IX] and [IY] registers.   
					Under the enhanced CP/M the [DE], [IX], and [IY]   
					registers will return standard values which will   
					normally be ignored by standard CP/M software.   
					The [DE] register will return containing the   
					address of DPBASE, which is the base address of   
					the disk parameter header table as described in   
					the Alterations Guide. Due to memory limita-   
					tions, there are only eight DPWs which limits   
					CP/M to only drives A:-H:. This is an increase   
					from the original Microsoft distribution system   
					which only had space for six DPH’s.   
					Page C-2   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				 
			 
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. C - CP/M NOTES   
					The [IX] register will return pointing to the   
					slot number times 16 for the controller to which   
					drive [C] is attached. The drive number of   
					drive [C] on that controller card will be at   
					[IX]+16. These values are within a drive   
					mapping table described below.   
					The [IY) register will return pointing to drive   
					[C]’s seek table entry. The seek table is also   
					described below. Important: The seek table is   
					located in the alternate bank of the ramcard   
					(remember, 56K system required). The alternate   
					bank of the ramcard will normally be mapped-out   
					(primary bank mapped-in) whenever the BIOS is   
					not in control of the system (since its the only   
					one expecting an alternate bank). To access the   
					seek tables, the alternate bank must be mapped-   
					in and then back out while leaving the ramcard   
					write enabled.   
					C. 2. Drive Mapping Table   
					The original Apple II CP/M as distributed by   
					Microsoft assumed that there were. only two   
					drives for every controller card it found in the   
					Apple. This allowed the BIOS to do some quick   
					and simple math to calculate where it could find   
					the physical drive (slot and drive number)   
					associate with CP/M’s logical drive (A:—P:).   
					Since the Rana enhancements take into account   
					any combination of Rana four-drive Elite   
					Controllers and Apple two-drive Disk II   
					controllers, quick and simple math was no longer   
					Page C-3   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. C - CP/M NOTES   
					possible. Replacing the simple math is a drive   
					mapping table which is dynamically filled-in   
					during the boot process with the physical slot   
					and drive numbers for each of the 16 possible   
					CP/M logical drives. (Note: The table has room   
					for 16 drive entries, but there are only enough   
					DPH’s allocated for 8 drives.)   
					The cold start initialization code scans all   
					cards in the Apple and determines which are Disk   
					IX controllers, which are Elite Controllers, and   
					which are non-disk I/O cards. The scanning goes   
					in reverse order from slot 7 back down to slot   
					1. Whenever a disk controller is found, the   
					next two or four CP/M logical drives (depending   
					on which controller was found) are mapped (in   
					the mapping table) to that controller card ‘s   
					drives.   
					The mapping table consists of two parts: the   
					slot numbers times 16 for each of the CP/M   
					drives (A:-P:), followed by the drive number of   
					the controller for the 16 CP/M drives. Both   
					parts consist of single byte elements. If the   
					SELDSK vector is called with [C] equal to 0   
					(drive A:), then [IX] will return pointing to   
					drive A:’s slot*16 entry which is also the base   
					address of the mapping table. Drive A: ‘s drive   
					number of that controller card can be found at   
					[IX]+ 16.   
					Page C-4   
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. C - CP/M NOTES   
					C.3. Seek Configuration Table   
					The seek table is what informs the 6502 RWTS   
					disk drivers of the head movement character-   
					istics of each drive. The table contains 16   
					entries, one for each CP/M logical drive. The   
					SELDSK vector will return the [IY] register   
					pointing to drive [C]’s entry within the table.   
					The base of the table is drive A: ‘s entry, and   
					each entry is a single byte.   
					Bits 7 (MSB) through 1 determine the seek speed   
					used when seeking the drive from cylinder to   
					cylinder. Bit 0 (LSB) is the single phase per   
					cylinder flag hit.   
					0000 000X = Spiral Cam Seek Rate   
					0000 001X = Lead Screw Seek Rate   
					0000 0l0X = Band Pulley Seek Rate   
					XXXX XXX0 = Two Phases per Cylinder   
					XXYX XXX1 = One Phase per Cylinder   
					Page C-5   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. C - CP/M NOTES   
					C.4. 6502 RWTS Alterations   
					The calling protocol is unchanged for the 6502   
					RWTS disk drivers. The only difference is that   
					sector numbers from 16—31 will result in the   
					enhanced RWTS trying to access the second head   
					on the drive, which would only be effective for   
					the Elite Two and Elite Three. Also, a request   
					for drive 3 or 4 will cause the RWTS to try to   
					access the second hank of an Elite Controller   
					regardless of the controller card in use. This   
					will result in reselecting drive 1 or 2 on a   
					Disk II controller without the software really   
					being aware of the difference.   
					When the RWTS attempts to determine the seek   
					rate to use on the drive, it takes the slot*16   
					and drive values it was given and scans the   
					drive map table in the BIOS to determine the   
					logical CP/M drive being accessed. It then uses   
					this logical drive number to index the seek   
					configuration table. This is the reason for   
					supplying seek configuration tables with entries   
					for all 16 possible drives, even though CP/M   
					itself is only supplied with 8 drives worth of   
					DPH’s.   
					Under normal use, the drive mapping table would   
					not be altered dynamically by a user (transient)   
					program; but if for some reason it is, then the   
					program doing the altering must keep in mind how   
					the RWTS seek drivers index the tables (as ex-   
					plained above).   
					Page C-6   
					 
				 
			 
		 
		
			
				
					ELITE SERIES USER MANUAL   
					APPEN. D   
					D. APPENDI X D   
					Thi s a ppe ndi x s e c t i on ha s be e n i nt e nt i ona l l y   
					omi t t e d.   
					Page D- 1   
					 
				 
			 
		 
	 |